Trinity Or Not

December 1, 2014

© OJG and sonofgodwordsoul.com, 2013 Unauthorized use and/or duplication of this material without express and written permission from this blog’s author and/or owner is strictly prohibited. Excerpts and links may be used, provided that full and clear credit is given to OJG and sonofgodwordsoul.com with appropriate and specific direction to the original content.

It is my desire that you know the discussion concerning the Minim in their beliefs concerning the Trinity. I do not wish to enter much into this discussion because it is reserved for the scholary only. It is an extremely lengthy discussion many scholary authors have written about. The only thing I can tell you by the Lord God YHVH’s grace is that it is dangerous to say that the Messiah (mere man) can be elevated to the same spiritual level alongside the Lord God YHVH at His right hand. It is also very dangerous to say that the Messiah can or should receive the same glory and worship that belongs only to YHVH. This Messiah, according to Christians is the anti christ. He doesn’t answer to YHVH. Neither does he take into consideration any other lesser god. He arrogantly places himself above all. No where is this made so clear than in chapter 11 of the book of Daniel where the false messiah shows himself for who he truly is, the dictator of dictators. What the anti christ decrees is absolute and final. The fallen angel satan is the arrogant and prideful spirit that is behind the voice of the anti christ. The voice of satan spoke to Yeshua and revealed that satan wanted Yeshua to worship satan.

36 “The king will do as he pleases; he will exalt and magnify himself above every god, and he will speak awful things against the God of gods. He will prosper until wrath is spent, and what has been decreed is accomplished.
37 He will not have regard for the god of his ancestors or for the one dear to women; he will not have regard for any god, but will magnify himself above all. (Dan 11:36-37 TNK)

6 and said to him, “I will give you all this power and glory. It has been handed over to me, and I can give it to whomever I choose. (Luk 4:6 CJB)

 

The other verses below refer to the ascribing of Glory to the Lord God. The Psalm of David within the context of 1 Chronicles chapter 16 ascribes glory to the Lord God and is echoed by the Psalm 96. The people of the Lord God are told to ascribe glory to the Lord God in Psalms 96 and 115. However, king David did not receive glory from the Lord God. The Lord God does not share His glory with any other gods. In fact, all other gods are only idols in comparison to the Lord God. There are no other gods but the Lord God Himself. King David made a recognition to the supreme Kingship of the Lord God. All are commanded to bow and confess the Lord God and Yeshua as Lord.

10 The LORD sat enthroned at the Flood; the LORD sits enthroned, king forever. (Psa 29:10 TNK)

 23 By Myself have I sworn, From My mouth has issued truth, A word that shall not turn back: To Me every knee shall bend, Every tongue swear loyalty. (Isa 45:23 TNK)

 11 since it is written in the Tanakh, “As I live, says ADONAI, every knee will bend before me, and every tongue will publicly acknowledge God.” (Rom 14:11 CJB)

11 and every tongue will acknowledge that Yeshua the Messiah is ADONAI – to the glory of God the Father. (Phi 2:11 CJB)

8 I am the LORD, that is My name; I will not yield My glory to another, Nor My renown to idols. (Isa 42:8 TNK)

11 For My sake, My own sake, do I act — Lest My name be dishonored! I will not give My glory to another. (Isa 48:11 TNK)

26 All the gods of the peoples are mere idols, but the LORD made the heavens.
27 Glory and majesty are before Him; strength and joy are in His place.
28 “Ascribe to the LORD, O families of the peoples, ascribe to the LORD glory and strength.
29 Ascribe to the LORD the glory of His name, bring tribute and enter before Him, bow down to the LORD majestic in holiness. (1Ch 16:26-29 TNK)

35 Declare: Deliver us, O God, our deliverer, and gather us and save us from the nations, to acclaim Your holy name, to glory in Your praise. (1Ch 16:35 TNK)

12 To the end that my glory may sing praise to thee, and not be silent. O LORD my God, I will give thanks unto thee for ever. {my glory: that is, my tongue, or, my soul} (Psa 30:12 KJV)

13 that my whole being might sing hymns to You endlessly; O LORD my God, I will praise You forever. (Psa 30:13 TNK)

1 Not to us, O LORD, not to us but to Your name bring glory for the sake of Your love and Your faithfulness. (Psa 115:1 TNK)

7 Ascribe to the LORD, O families of the peoples, ascribe to the LORD glory and strength. (Psa 96:7 TNK)

8 Ascribe to the LORD the glory of His name, bring tribute and enter His courts. (Psa 96:8 TNK)

12 Let them do honor to the LORD, And tell His glory in the coastlands. (Isa 42:12 TNK)

The angels or the divine beings are commanded to give glory to the Lord God in Psalms 29. However, the Lord God’s angels do not receive worship from the Lord God. Neither do they receive worship from men. In fact there are prophetic warnings issued to those who do not do honor to the Lord God’s name. One such example is found in Malachi chapter 2 and states that the blessings that the Lord God gives can and will be turned into curses on anyone that does not honor the Lord God’s name. Another example is found in the book of Jeremiah in chapter 13 where it is stated that a time of great darkness will come on those that will not honor the Lord God’s name, though wish to have light. This is precisely why any man that is not Yeshua (Word of the Lord God in place of the human), the Word of the Lord God incarnate, should not rule and reign as MESSIAH. No angelic being, including satan, neither any man will ever be promoted by the Lord God to such a position of absolute power and authority and great glory. Yeshua, the Messiah was not promoted but only returned back to the position of Word of the Lord God in the flesh (Divine Word in place of the human soul) that He always had before He was incarnated in the flesh. It takes a revelation of Yeshua to avoid the pitfall of deception that a mere man can receive the same glory as the Lord God does.

 5 וְקוֹל קֹרֵא יָצָא מִן־הַכִּסֵּא לֵאמֹר הַלֲלוּ אֶת־אֱלֹהֵינוּ כָּל־עֲבָדָיו וִירֵאָיו הַקְּטַנִּים עִם־הַגְּדוֹלִים׃ (Rev 19:5 HNT) See below the english translation from http://translation2.paralink.com/translator/default.asp

10 וַאֲנִי נָפַלְתִּי לְרַגְלָיו לְהִשְׁתַּחֲוֹת לוֹ וַיֹּאמֶר אֵלַי לֹא־כֵן רְאֵה אָנֹכִי עֶבֶד כָּמוֹךָ וְחָבֵר אֲנִי לְךָ וּלְאַחֶיךָ הַמַּחֲזִיקִים בְּעֵדוּת יֵשׁוּעַ לֵאלֹהִים תִּשְׁתַּחֲוֶה כִּי עֵדוּת יֵשׁוּעַ הִיא רוּחַ הַנְּבוּאָה׃
(Rev 19:10 HNT)  See below the english translation from http://translation2.paralink.com/translator/default.asp

1 A psalm of David. Ascribe to the LORD, O divine beings, ascribe to the LORD glory and strength. (Psa 29:1 TNK)

2 Ascribe to the LORD the glory of His name; bow down to the LORD, majestic in holiness. (Psa 29:2 TNK)

9 the voice of the LORD causes hinds to calve, and strips forests bare; while in His temple all say “Glory!” (Psa 29:9 TNK)

13 Moreover, to which of the angels has he ever said, “Sit at my right hand until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet”? (Heb 1:13 CJB)

9 She will adorn your head with a graceful wreath; Crown you with a glorious diadem.” (Pro 4:9 TNK)

19 No longer shall you need the sun For light by day, Nor the shining of the moon For radiance by night; For the LORD shall be your light everlasting, Your God shall be your glory. (Isa 60:19 TNK)

17 the God of our Lord Yeshua the Messiah, the glorious Father, to give you a spirit of wisdom and revelation, so that you will have full knowledge of him. (Eph 1:17 CJB)

6 For it is the God who once said, “Let light shine out of darkness,” who has made his light shine in our hearts, the light of the knowledge of God’s glory shining in the face of the Messiah Yeshua. (2Co 4:6 CJB)

16 Give honor to the LORD your God Before He brings darkness, Before your feet stumble On the mountains in shadow — When you hope for light, And it is turned to darkness And becomes deep gloom. (Jer 13:16 TNK)

2 Unless you obey and unless you lay it to heart, and do honor to My name — said the LORD of Hosts — I will send a curse and turn your blessings into curses. (Indeed, I have turned them into curses, because you do not lay it to heart.) (Mal 2:2 TNK)

18 Was no one found coming back to give glory to God except this foreigner?” (Luk 17:18 CJB)

11 Then I looked, and I heard the sound of a vast number of angels – thousands and thousands, millions and millions! They were all around the throne, the living beings and the elders;

12 and they shouted out, “Worthy is the slaughtered Lamb to receive power, riches, wisdom, strength, honor, glory and praise!”
13 And I heard every creature in heaven, on earth, under the earth and on the sea – yes, everything in them – saying, “To the One sitting on the throne and to the Lamb belong praise, honor, glory and power forever and ever!”
14 The four living beings said, “Amen!” and the elders fell down and worshipped. (Rev 5:11-14 CJB)

6 Next I saw another angel flying in mid-heaven with everlasting Good News to proclaim to those living on the earth – to every nation, tribe, language and people.
7 In a loud voice he said, “Fear God, give him glory, for the hour has come when he will pass judgment! Worship the One who made heaven and earth, the sea and the springs of water!” (Rev 14:6-7 CJB)

 

Two questions need to be asked. 1. Is there a counsel of angles that the Lord God has? 2. Did the Lord God consult them when making man in His image? The question is extremely important to ask just who are the “Holy Ones?” This will determine if they are indeed the angels that the tradition of the Rodkinson Babylonian Talmud says they are. See below the scriptures that pertain to these questions. The English, Hebrew transliterated and Hebrew letters are highlighted with respect to the words that are in question.  Let us pay particular attention to the Holladay entries: Hol 6607; Hol 121; Hol 7202, Hol 913; Hol 1852, Hol 3602.

26 And God said, “Let us make man in our image, after our likeness. They shall rule the fish of the sea, the birds of the sky, the cattle, the whole earth, and all the creeping things that creep on earth.” (Gen 1:26 TNK)

26 wayyöº´mer ´élöhîm na|`áSè ´ädäm Bücal•mëºnû Kid•mûtëºnû wüyir•Dû bid•gat hayyäm ûbü`ôp haššämaºyim ûbaBBühëmâ ûbükol-hä´äºrec ûbükol-häreºmeS hä|römëS `al-hä´äºrec (Gen 1:26 BHT)

26 וַיֹּ֣אמֶר אֱלֹהִ֔ים נַֽעֲשֶׂ֥ה אָדָ֛ם בְּצַלְמֵ֖נוּ כִּדְמוּתֵ֑נוּ וְיִרְדּוּ֩ בִדְגַ֙ת הַיָּ֜ם וּבְע֣וֹף הַשָּׁמַ֗יִם וּבַבְּהֵמָה֙ וּבְכָל־הָאָ֔רֶץ וּבְכָל־הָרֶ֖מֶשׂ הָֽרֹמֵ֥שׂ עַל־הָאָֽרֶץ׃
(Gen 1:26 WTT) See below WTM and Holladay entries starting from right to left

w> particle conjunction rma verb qal waw consec imperfect 3rd person masculine singular homonym 1

Hol595 rm;a’
I rm;a’ (5280 ×): qal: pf. Œa, yTir.m;a’, yTir.m'(a’; impf. rm;ayO, rm'(ayO, rm;aTo, rme(aTo, rm;(aOYw:, rm,aOYw:, rm;ao, rm'(ao, rm;¿AÀaow”, hr’m.Aaw”Æw>, Wrm.aOy, Wrme(ayO, hn”r.m;aTo, ^r.m;aTo, Wrm.To 2S 1914, !rum.aTo, rm;aOn, rm,aONw:; impv. rmoa/¿w<), -rm’a/, yrim.ai; inf. rmoa/¿B,ÆK,), -rm’a/, rmoa] Ez 258, alw. rmoale ( 3× rAmale), yrim.a’, ~r’m.a’, ^r.m’a], abs. r¿AÀmoa’ pt. rme¿AÀao, tr,m,ñao, hr’m.ao, ~yrim.ao, yrem.ao, t¿AÀrom.ao, rWma’h, Mi 27 (txt ?): — 1. say, the simple rendering of speech (:: rB,Di speak Lv 12), of men Gn 223, God 13, animal 31; speech follows in dir. Gn 32 or indir. 1213 discourse; prophetic oracle oft. introduced by kœh °¹mar yhwh; °¹mar never appears w/o words of speech, so that Gn 48 &c. lack s.thg; say s.thg to s.one, w. °el Gn 316, l® 317; say s.thg about s.one °el (for ±al) 2K 1932; — 2. l¢°mœr, ‘in order to say’ usually means ‘as he/she said,’ ‘with these words,’ Gn 122; often no more than our quotation marks, pause before dir. discourse Ex 610, even after dabb¢r 2S 1912, & in cases like Am 85 1K 15; — 3. w. acc.: a) mention: a) s.one Gn 4327, ß) s.thg Gn 222, mention with praise, praise Ps 4011, g) name, call, w. l® Is 520, w. 2 acc. La 215; say s.thg of s.one (l®) Ps 416; promise 2K 819, w. l® w. inf. Ne 915; — 4. say to oneself = think, °¹mar b®libbô Gn 1717, °a. °el-libbô 821, l®libbô Ho 72, °¹mar alone, oft. for a false assumption Gn 4428; — 5. °¹mar w. l® & inf. intend Ex 214; — 6. order Est 117; contents of order in its fulfillment Ps 10531•34.

nif.: pf. rm;a/n<; impf. rmea’yE, rm;(a’yE, rm,a’ñyE Is 43: — 1. be said Nu 2114; — 2. = one says (current saying), Gn 109; — 3. be named, called (« qal 3) Gn 3229.

hif.: pf. T’r.m;a/h,, ^r.ymia/x,: cause to say, proclaim ( covenant formulation), Dt 2617f. † (pg 21)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

~yhil{a/ noun common masculine plural absolute

Hol454 H;Ala/
H;Ala/ & ~yhil{a/: I. H;Ala/ (ca. 60 ×), H;l{a/ Dt 3217, 2K 1731 Kt, Hb 111f, Dn 1138 †; most oft. in Jb (41 ×): — 1. a God/god Ps 1832, kœl-°®lœ­h any god Dn 1137, lœ° °®lœ­h non-god(s) Dt 3217; — 2. the true God Jb 34.

(pg 17)

Hol455 ~yhil{a/
II. ~yhil{a/ ( 2250 ×), with waw Ps 1847 14310 1451 †; cs. yhel{a/, sf. yh;l{a/, wyh’l{a/, ~h,yhel{a/, Amyheñl{a/; w. pref. ~yhil{aBe, ŒawE, ŒaKe, Œale; but Œa/me Ps 86 (« !mi): — 1. gods, kœl-°®lœhê miƒrayim Ex 1212, °®lœhê h¹°®lœhîm God of gods Dt 1017, °®lœhîm °­µ¢rîm (64 ×, « °aµ¢r), b®nê(h¹) °®lœhîm Gn 62 sons of the gods (oth.: sons of God) Jb 16 21 387, †, cf. b®nê °¢lîm; — 2. as a sg.: God, Deity; a) fm. the form, occasionally construed as pl., hit±û °®lœhîm Gn 2013, °®lœhîm µayyîm living God Dt 523; b) construed as sg., yhwh hû° h¹°®lœhîm it is Y. who is God Dt 435; occurs both w. & w/o def. art. w/o difference of mng.; euphony & free choice?; c) God/god or goddess of a people, land, °®lœhê yi´r¹°êl Ex 51, ±aštoret °®lœhê ƒidœnîm 1K 115; d) God/god of a specific domain: °®lœhê hašš¹mayim & °®l. h¹°¹reƒ Gn 243, °®l. kœl-b¹´¹r Je 3227; w. qualifying gen.: °®lohê ±ô1¹m Is 4028 ; e) God/god of individual: of David 2K 205, °®lœhê °¹bî Gn 3142; — 3. misc. a) h¢bî° °et-hadd®b¹rîm °el-h¹°®lœhîm bring cases before God (for judgment) Ex 1819; b) Moses is l¢°lœhîm for Aaron (has the place of God) Ex 416; c) a spirit of the dead 1S 2813; d) w. or w/o art., like a proper noun, equivalent to & interchanging w. yhwh, difficult to distinguish from appellative use; in Ps 42–83 °®lœhîm is mostly a substitute for yhwh; e) °®lœhîm superlative? rû­µ °®lœhîm mighty wind Gn 12, n®´î° °®lœhîm mighty prince Gn 236. (pg 17)

hf[ verb qal imperfect 1st person common plural cohortative in meaning, but no unique form for cohortative homonym 1

Hol6607 hf'[‘
hf'[‘ (2600 × ): qal: pf. Œ[, ht’f.[‘(, tf'[‘ Lv 2521, t’yfi[‘, tyfi[‘, Wf[‘, !t,yfi[], Wnyfi[‘, sf. Whf’ñ[‘, ^f.[‘(, ynIt.f'([‘, Whytiyfi[], ynItiyfi[]; impf. hf,[]y:, f[;y:, f[;Y:w:, hf,[]T;, hfe[]T;, Jos 79 & 2S 1312 & fe[]T; Je 4016 Qr, f[;T;, yfi[]T;, hf,[/a,, Wf[]y:, hn”yf,[]T;, hf,[]n:, hfe[]N:w: ! Jos 924, sf. Whfe[]y:, ~fe[]y:, ^f.[,a,, hN”f,[/a,; impv. hfe[], yfi[], Wf[], inf. tAf[], hf[], Af[], sf. Whf[], Ht’f[], abs. hf[‘, pt. hf,¿AÀ[o, cs. hfe¿AÀ[o, f. hf'[o, pl. ~yfi[o, cs. yfe[o, f. tAf[o, sf. Whfe[o, wyf'[o, yf'([o, pass, yWf[‘, > Wf[‘, Jb 4125, f. hy”Wf[], hy”fu[], pl. ~yIWf[], f. tAWf[], Kt tyOWf[], Qr 1S 2518: — 1. make, manufacture Gn 321, lay out (garden) Am 914; — 2. make, apply Ex 3924 (w. ±al), Ez 4119 (w. °el); — 3. make s.thg (acc.) into s.thg (l®) Is 4417; w. 2 acc. 2K 316; make s.thg out of s.thg. (material) (2 acc.) Ex 3724; make s.thg with s.thg (b®) 1C 188; — 4. God as sub., = create Gn 17; pt. pass. created Jb 4125, pt. act. maker = creator Jb 417; — 5. derived mng.: effect, produce, do: a wonder Ex 1110, cogn. acc. deed Gn 209; of cow, produce (milk) Is 722, of man, put on (fat) Jb 1527, of plants, bear (fruit) Gn 111; acquire, win (glory) Gn 311, (nefeš = slaves) Gn 125; ±œ´ê ´eker hired laborers Is 1910; — 6. prepare (food) Gn 187f, ±¹´ûy dressed (sheep) 1S 2518; take care of (feet, beard) 2S 1925; prepare s.thg for sacrifice 1K 1823; officiate 2K 1732; — 7. make (appoint) s.one (l®, to be …) Gn 122; — 8. var.: ±¹´â š¹lôm l® make peace w. Is 275; ±¹´â milµ¹mâ wage war Gn 142; ±¹´â y¹mîm spend days Ec 612; — 9. perform, carry out (orders) Ps 1118, (d®b¹rîm) Is 4216, (plan) Is 301; keep (Passover) Ex 1248; — 10. w. m®l¹°kâ do work 1K 1128, ±œ´ê m®l¹°kâ workmen 2K 1212; — 11. abs. act, step in Gn 4134 1S 146; — 12. w. °­šer cause s.thg to be done Ez 3627, w. še- Ec 314; — 13. work Gn 3030; ±¹´â b®tôk work s.thg into Ex 393; be busy 1K 2040; ±¹´â ‰ôb enjoy onesf. † Ec 312; — 14. w. ƒ®d¹qâ exercise justice Gn 1819, w. n®b¹lâ commit an outrage Gn 347, w. µesed show kindness Gn 2412; — 15. do: what have you done to (l®) us? Gn 209; oath-formula: kœh ya±­´eh-l®k¹ °®lœhim … 1S 317; 16. reflects mng. of previous vb., do, manage Je 125.

nif. (95 ×): pf. hf'[]n:, ht’f.[,n<, ht’f'([/n<, Wf[]n:; impf. hf,[‘yE, hf,[‘yTi Ex 2531 rd. hf,[‘Te, f[‘Te, Wf[‘yE, hn”yf,[‘Te; inf. tAf[‘he, sf. WtAf[‘he; pt. hf,[]n:, f. hf'[]n:, pl. ~yfi[]n:: — 1. be done: ma±­´îm Gn 209; be followed, carried out: advice 2S 1723; impers. y¢±¹´eh l® it shall be done to 1S 117; — 2. be made, manufactured, prepared: food Ex 1216, ark (of covt.) Je 316 , sacrifice Ez 4318; be kept: Passover 2K 2322f; be made = created: heavens Ps 336; y¢±¹´eh l® is used for Ez 155.

piel: pf. WF[i, cj. inf. tAF[;: press, squeeze Ez 233•8 cj. 21. †

pual (pass. qal): pf. ytiyFe[u: I was made = created Ps 13915. † (pg 285)

~d’a’ noun common masculine singular absolute homonym 1

Hol121 ~d’a’
I ~d’a’ (only abs.; ca. 540 ×): — 1. coll. people, a) w. pl.: Je 472; but b) mostly w. sg. 1S 251; c) b®nê °¹d¹m (38 ×) Dt 83, b®nê h¹°¹d¹m Gn 115, (single) men; ben-°¹d¹m single man, esp. in Ez, « b¢n 4; d) in cs.- constr.: l¢b °¹d¹m Gn 821 &c; e) appositional: °¹d¹m b®liyya±al men that are ruiners = ruinous Pr 612; f) w. negation: lœ° … °¹d¹m Ps 10514, °¹d¹m lœ° Lv 167 no one; — 2. single person (late; coll. meaning usually possible): b®°¹d¹ (in) someone Lv 225; — 3. Gn 1–5: 126-31 coll. people, men; coll. also in chh. 2f, 51b–2: 425 51a•3•5, « III ~d’a’. (pg 4)
II ~d’a’: leather Ho 114. † (pg 4)
III ~d’a’: n. pers., « I 2: Adam, first in Gn 425, 51a•3•5, 1C 11. † (pg 4)
IV ~d’a’: = I hm’d’a] ground; ±ên °¹d¹m surface of the earth Zc 91. (pg 4)
V ~d’a’: n. loc. Jos 316 (rd: b®°¹d¹m) & Ho 67 (rd: b®°¹d¹m). † (pg 4)

B. particle preposition ~l,c, noun common masculine singular construct suffix 1st person common plural homonym 1

Hol7202 ~l,c,
I ~l,c,: sf. Aml.c;, Wnmel.c;; pl. cs. ymel.c;, sf. wym’l’c., ~k,ymel.c;: — 1. statue 2K 1118; ƒalmê mass¢kœt cast-metal statues Nu 3352; — 2. image, model 1S 65; image, drawing Ez 2314; — 3. image (i.e. man in image of God) Gn 126f. (pg 306)
II ~l,c,: sf. ~m’l.c;: shadow, s.thg shadowy, form w/o substance Ps 397 7320. † (pg 306)
Hol913 B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)

K. particle preposition tWmD> noun common feminine singular construct suffix 1st person common plural

Hol1852 tWmD>
tWmD.: sf. AtWmD., WnteWmD.: — 1. pattern 2K 1610; — 2. form, shape Gn 126; d®mût something like Ez 126; — 3. image (of God) Is 4018, (of man) Ez 2315. (pg 72)
Hol3662 K.
K.: « AmK., rv,a]K;; alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~AYK; & ~AYh;K., hM,K;, hM’K;; ~t’Aba]K;, wyn”doaK;, hwhyK; 1S 22, rybiaK; Is 1013 (Qr, ryBiK; rd Kt ryBia;K.), ~yhil{aKe, rAma/K,, ytiyrib.Ki, Ht’r.ybiG>K; Is 242; sf. ~k,K’, ~h,K’, hM’heñK’, !heK’, hN”heñK’, otherw. « AmK.: particle of comparison, like: — 1. expresses identity: a) kullô k®°adderet ´¢±¹r altogether like a hairy mantle Gn 2525, w®°¹habt¹ l®r¢±­k¹ k¹môka like yourself Lv 1918; °ên q¹dôš k®yhwh = except ? 1S 22; k®lœ° h¹yû like those who had not been = as if they had not been Ob10; b) w. k® 2 ×: a) the designated subj. first: k¹±¹m kakkœh¢n the people like the pr. Is 242, k¹mônî k¹môk¹ I, like you Gn 4418; ß) the term of comparison first: kaƒƒaddîq k¹r¹š¹± the godless like the righteous Gn 1825; k® … k¢n Ps 1274; — 2. agreement in measure: a) as much as: k¹kem °elef p®±¹mîm 1000 times as many as you are Dt 111; b) > about ( = approximately): k®pe´a± only (about) a pace 1S 203, k®mišlœš µ¯d¹šîm about 3 months later Gn 3824; — 3. agreement in kind: in the same way as, of the same sort as: k¢°lœhîm Gn 35 , °îš k¹mônî Gn 4415; k¹zœ°t (something) like this, such a thing Is 668; > suitable to, according to: kidmût¢nû Gn 126, k®š¢m after the name of Gn 417; — 4. preps. a) are included in k®: k®har as on the mountain Is 2821, kaµ­lôm as in a dream Is 297; b) otherwise, in fixed expressions: k®b¹ri°šœnâ Ju 2032; — 5. seemingly superfluous, accentuating: °attâ k®°aµad m¢hem, just like Ob11; — 6. as stylistic device to describe a vision, ‘something like’: k®mar°¢h g¹ber one who looked like a man Dn 815; — 7. k® & inf.: a) comparison: ke°®kœl as … devours Is 524; b) temporal: k®bô° when he came Gn 1214, kir°ôtô as soon as he sees Gn 4431; before a noun in verbal sense: k®tom- when it is finished Is 185. (pg 149)

w> particle conjunction hdr verb qal imperfect 3rd person masculine plural jussive in meaning, but no unique form for jussive homonym 1

Hol7783 hdr
I hdr: qal: pf. Wdr’, ~t,ydir.; impf. hD,r.Ti, D.r.yEw>, WDr.yIw>, WND,r.yI; impv. hder., Wdr.; inf. tAdr.; pt. hd,ro, ~ydiro: — 1. tread (in the wine-press) Jl 413; — 2. rule, govern abs. Ps 728, w. b® over Gn 126.

[hif.: impf. D.r.y: Is 412; rd perh. ð rdd, or txt. corr. †] (pg 333)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

B. particle preposition hg”D’ noun common feminine singular construct

Hol1738 hg”D’
hg”D’: f. of gD’: cs. tg:D., sf. ~t’g”D.: fish (coll. pl.) Ex 718•21. (pg 68)
Hol913 B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)

h; particle article ~y” noun common masculine singular absolute

Hol3354 ~y”
~y” (390 ×): cs. usu. (-À~y”, but alw. @Ws-~y: Ex 138 & oft.; loc. hM’y”), sf. HM’y:; pl. ~yMiy:, m.: — sea, i.e. the great inland waters & larger rivers: — 1. genl.: sg. Gn 126; :: land Ex 2011; — 2. pl. sea Dn 1145 = totality of waters (cf. Gn 110); pl. seas Dt 3319: — 3. spec. seas: a) the Mediterranean & its portions: y¹m hagg¹dôl Jos 14, y¹m p®lištîm Ex 2331, hayy¹m h¹°aµ­rôn Dt 1124; b) the Dead Sea: y¹m hammelaµ Gn 143, y¹m ha±­r¹bâ 2K 1425, hayy¹m haqqadmônî Ez 4718; c) the Sea of Galilee: y¹m kinneret Nu 3411, y¹m kinrôt Jos 123; d) yam-sûf Sea of Reeds, loc. y¹TÄmmâ sûf Ex 1019, « I sûf; e) y¹m-miƒrayim Is 1115 the Sea of Reeds (but oth.: the Medit. Sea, or the Nile); — 3. miyy¹m ±ad y¹m Am 812: geogr.: fm. the Dead Sea to the Medit. Sea, or fm. the Euphrates to the Medit., or mythological; — 4. y¹m oft. = Medit. Sea, thus y¹m = west: y¹TÄmmâ to the west Gn 1314, miyy¹m from the west Gn 128, p®°at y¹m the west side Ex 2712, rû­µ y¹m west wind Ez 1019 > west side Ez 4219; miyy¹m l® westward fm. Jos 89; — 5. of large rivers: Nile Is 181, branches of N. Ez 322; Euphrates Je 5136; — 6. cosmological: qarqa± hayy¹m Am 93; — 7. name of Ugaritic god of sea Ps 7413; — 8. cultic, the bronze ‘sea’ 1K 724f•44. (pg 135)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

w> particle conjunction B. particle preposition @A[ noun common masculine singular construct

Hol6151 @A[
@A[ (70 ×): coll.: flying creatures: birds (& insects) Gn 120. (pg 268)
Hol913 B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

h; particle article ~yIm;v’ noun common masculine plural absolute

Hol8717 ~yIm;v’
~yIm;v’ (420 ×): ~yIm'(v’, cs. ymev., sf. ^ym,v’, wym’v’, ~k,ymev.; loc. hm’y>m;ñV’h;, (oft. w. pl. adj. or vb.): heaven(s), sky: — 1. = firmament Gn 18 ; windows of heaven 711; rain fm. heaven 82, fire fm. heaven 1924; stars in heaven 2217; — 2. = upper atmosphere (below the ‘firmament’), air, sky: birds of, Gn 126; — 3. associated w. God as his dwelling 1K 823, but heavens cannot contain God 827. (pg 375)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)
Hol969 hm’heB.
hm’heB.: cs. tm;h/B,, sf. ATm.h,B.; pl. tAmheB., cs. tAmh]B;: usu. coll., exc. Ne 212•14: — 1. animals in genl.: a) :: man Ex 99; b) four-footed animals :: birds, fish, reptiles 1K 513; — 2. wild animals, beh®mat h¹°¹reƒ Dt 2826, beh®mat ha´´¹deh 1S 1744, oft. pl. Dt 3224; — 3. domestic animals, cattle :: µayyâ Gn 81, :: šôr & µ­môr Dt 514; = b¹q¹r & ƒœ°n Lv 12 (thus also sheep); included under µayyâ Lv 112; beasts of burden Gn 3423. (pg 34)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)
Hol913 B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

w> particle conjunction B. particle preposition lKo noun common masculine singular construct h; particle article #r,a, noun common feminine singular absolute

Hol809 #r,a,
#r,a, (ca. 2400 ×): #r,a’h’, #r,a'(, loc. hc’r.a; & hc’r.a'(ñ (also in cs.); sf. ^c.r.a;, ^c,(r.a;; pl. t¿AÀcor’a], cs. tAcr.a;, sf. ~t’cor.a;; f.: — 1. ground: esp. loc. °árƒâ, Gn 182 did obeisance to the ground. 389 spilled it on the ground; °ereƒ, Ju 637ff; — 2. piece of land Gn 2315; — 3. territory, land: °ereƒ miƒrayim, °ereƒ k®na±an Gn 4713, pl. Is 3718; 4. — totality of land, earth: hašš¹mayim w®h¹°¹reƒ Gn 21•4a; — 5. taµtiyyôt °ereƒ depths of the earth Is 4423, > °ereƒ underworld Ex 1512. (pg 28)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)
Hol3766 lKo
lKo,lAK Je 338 Kt †: cs. lKo Gn 25, usu. -lK’; lK’ Ps 3510 & Pr 197 sf. ALKu, hL{Ku, f. HL’Ku & aL’Ku Ez 365; 2. m. %l’Ku Mi 212, 2. f. %LeKu, %L’Ku Is 221 SS 47; ~L’Ku, ~L’WK Je 3134 & 2S 236, ~h,L.Ku, f. hn”L’Ku Gn 4236 Pr 3129 & hn”h.l’Ku 1K 737, ~k,L.Ku, WnL’Ku: totality: — 1. abs.: a) hakkœl: a) everything (there is) Ec 115; µ¹zût hakkœl the vision of all this Is 2911; b) everyone: y¹dô bakkœl his hand against everyone Gn 1612; b) kœl: a) everything: ±œ´eh kœl maker of all things Is 4424; kol-°­šer everything that Gn 395 (:: k®kol-°ašer ‘just as,’ Gn 622, strengthened ka°­šer); b) everyone: w®tammû kœl and everyone will perish Je 4412; — 2. kœl before a determinate noun (i.e. w. art. or possessive suffix) expresses unity: kol-h¹°¹reƒ the whole earth Gn 919, kol-±ammî my whole people Gn 4110, kull¹h its entirety = it all (was watered) Gn 1310; — 3. as appositive, having a sf., placed after the noun: yi´r¹°¢l kullœh Isr. its entirety = all Isr. 2S 29; h¹±¹m kullô Is 98; kœl repeated: kol-bêt-yi´r¹°¢l kullô Ez 1115; — 4. before an indeterminate noun: kol-peh the whole mouth Is 911 (:: every mouth 916); b®kol-l¢b w. all one’s heart, wholeheartedly 2K 233; kol-±ôd the whole duration = as long as Jb 273, = still, yet 2S 19; — 5. w. an enumeration: total, all together: kol-±¹rîm ±e´er the total of cities, the cities in all were 10 Jos 2126; — 6. before a pl.: all: kol-haggôyim Is 22, kull¹m all of them Ps 10227; w. kœl repeated: kol-malkê gôyim kull¹m Is 1418 ; — 7. before a collective: all, every: kol-h¹°¹d¹m all men Gn 721, kol-habb®h¢mâ Gn 220; — 8. before a noun indicating single members: kol-habb¢n everyone who was a son = every son Ex 122; b®kol-hamm¹qôm at every place Ex 2024; kol-h¹°îš everyone 2S 152 = kullô Is 123; w. inf.: b®kol-yaµ¢m at every (instance of) being in heat = whenever they were in heat Gn 3041; — 9. before sg. w/o art.: every: a) kol-±am every people Est 38; b) w. inf.: l®kol-h¢±îr h¹°®lœhîm to everyone (whose spirit) God had raised Ezr 15; c) kol-°iš µayil every = none but valiant men Ju 329; — 10. qualitative: a) of whatever sort, any: kol-b®h¢mâ any animal Lv 1823; b) of every sort, of all sorts: kol-‰ûb every sort of valuable Gn 2410; — II. w. a neg. (usu. separated fm. kol-), no … at all: lœ° … mikkol- from no tree … at all Gn 31, °ên-kœl nothing at all 2S 123; — 12. w. dependent pt.: kol-°îš zœb¢­µ everyone who, any time anyone offered sacrifice 1S 213; — 13. kœl in adv. acc.: ? totally: kol-ti´´¹° ±¹wœn Ho 143. (pg 157)
Hol913 B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

w> particle conjunction B. particle preposition lKo noun common masculine singular construct h; particle article fm,r, noun common masculine singular absolute

Hol7944 fm,r,
fm,r,: of animal world exc. large animals & birds: coll. small animals, reptiles Gn 124ff. (pg 341)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)
Hol3766 lKo
lKo,lAK Je 338 Kt †: cs. lKo Gn 25, usu. -lK’; lK’ Ps 3510 & Pr 197 sf. ALKu, hL{Ku, f. HL’Ku & aL’Ku Ez 365; 2. m. %l’Ku Mi 212, 2. f. %LeKu, %L’Ku Is 221 SS 47; ~L’Ku, ~L’WK Je 3134 & 2S 236, ~h,L.Ku, f. hn”L’Ku Gn 4236 Pr 3129 & hn”h.l’Ku 1K 737, ~k,L.Ku, WnL’Ku: totality: — 1. abs.: a) hakkœl: a) everything (there is) Ec 115; µ¹zût hakkœl the vision of all this Is 2911; b) everyone: y¹dô bakkœl his hand against everyone Gn 1612; b) kœl: a) everything: ±œ´eh kœl maker of all things Is 4424; kol-°­šer everything that Gn 395 (:: k®kol-°ašer ‘just as,’ Gn 622, strengthened ka°­šer); b) everyone: w®tammû kœl and everyone will perish Je 4412; — 2. kœl before a determinate noun (i.e. w. art. or possessive suffix) expresses unity: kol-h¹°¹reƒ the whole earth Gn 919, kol-±ammî my whole people Gn 4110, kull¹h its entirety = it all (was watered) Gn 1310; — 3. as appositive, having a sf., placed after the noun: yi´r¹°¢l kullœh Isr. its entirety = all Isr. 2S 29; h¹±¹m kullô Is 98; kœl repeated: kol-bêt-yi´r¹°¢l kullô Ez 1115; — 4. before an indeterminate noun: kol-peh the whole mouth Is 911 (:: every mouth 916); b®kol-l¢b w. all one’s heart, wholeheartedly 2K 233; kol-±ôd the whole duration = as long as Jb 273, = still, yet 2S 19; — 5. w. an enumeration: total, all together: kol-±¹rîm ±e´er the total of cities, the cities in all were 10 Jos 2126; — 6. before a pl.: all: kol-haggôyim Is 22, kull¹m all of them Ps 10227; w. kœl repeated: kol-malkê gôyim kull¹m Is 1418 ; — 7. before a collective: all, every: kol-h¹°¹d¹m all men Gn 721, kol-habb®h¢mâ Gn 220; — 8. before a noun indicating single members: kol-habb¢n everyone who was a son = every son Ex 122; b®kol-hamm¹qôm at every place Ex 2024; kol-h¹°îš everyone 2S 152 = kullô Is 123; w. inf.: b®kol-yaµ¢m at every (instance of) being in heat = whenever they were in heat Gn 3041; — 9. before sg. w/o art.: every: a) kol-±am every people Est 38; b) w. inf.: l®kol-h¢±îr h¹°®lœhîm to everyone (whose spirit) God had raised Ezr 15; c) kol-°iš µayil every = none but valiant men Ju 329; — 10. qualitative: a) of whatever sort, any: kol-b®h¢mâ any animal Lv 1823; b) of every sort, of all sorts: kol-‰ûb every sort of valuable Gn 2410; — II. w. a neg. (usu. separated fm. kol-), no … at all: lœ° … mikkol- from no tree … at all Gn 31, °ên-kœl nothing at all 2S 123; — 12. w. dependent pt.: kol-°îš zœb¢­µ everyone who, any time anyone offered sacrifice 1S 213; — 13. kœl in adv. acc.: ? totally: kol-ti´´¹° ±¹wœn Ho 143. (pg 157)
Hol913 B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

participle masculine singular absolute

Hol7943 fmr
fmr: qal: impf. fmor.Ti; pt. fme¿AÀro, tf,m,ro: swarm, teem (of vast numbers of creatures in water, on ground, in woods; in random movement) Gn 126. (pg 341)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

l[; particle preposition homonym 2 h; particle article #r,a, noun common feminine singular absolute

Hol809 #r,a,
#r,a, (ca. 2400 ×): #r,a’h’, #r,a'(, loc. hc’r.a; & hc’r.a'(ñ (also in cs.); sf. ^c.r.a;, ^c,(r.a;; pl. t¿AÀcor’a], cs. tAcr.a;, sf. ~t’cor.a;; f.: — 1. ground: esp. loc. °árƒâ, Gn 182 did obeisance to the ground. 389 spilled it on the ground; °ereƒ, Ju 637ff; — 2. piece of land Gn 2315; — 3. territory, land: °ereƒ miƒrayim, °ereƒ k®na±an Gn 4713, pl. Is 3718; 4. — totality of land, earth: hašš¹mayim w®h¹°¹reƒ Gn 21•4a; — 5. taµtiyyôt °ereƒ depths of the earth Is 4423, > °ereƒ underworld Ex 1512. (pg 28)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)
Hol6292 l[;
I l[;: l[‘(: height: š¹mayim m¢±¹l heaven above Gn 2739, huqam ±¹l be raised on high 2S 231; > amount Is 5918.
(pg 273)
II l[;: sf. yl;[‘, yl'([‘, ^yl,[‘, ykiy>l'([‘, wyl'[‘, h’yl,[‘h, 1S 924, Wnyle[‘, ~h,yle[] & ~h,le[], Amyle[‘; yle[]: — 1. higher than > on, over: š¹kab ±al 2S 47; > in front of (if one person is standing & the other sitting): dibber ±al Je 610, ±¹mad ±al Gn 188; garment on s.one Gn 3723; metaph. load (bride-price) on s.one Gn 3412: duty: it is for me to (w. l® & inf.) 2S 1811; ±al w. ƒiwwâ, p¹qad: order s.one to; w. sensual & emotion impressions: m¹tôq ±al sweet to (your taste) Pr 2413; on = (supported) by; µ¹yâ ±al live by Gn 2740; — 2. upon = because of: ±al-zœ°t, ±al-k¢n therefore; ±al-r¹±¹t¹m because of … Je 116; — 3. with regard to, concerning: w. regard to redemption Ru 47; — 4. according to, ±al-dibr¹tî according to the manner Ps 1104; ±al-pî = according to; — 5. over against: ±al-p¹nay over against me = in defiance of me Ex 203; > in spite of: ±al-da±t®k¹ in spite of your knowing Jb 107; — 6. (w. expr. of motion) onto: ±al-hammizb¢­µ Lv 17; ±¹lâ ±al-l¢b comes to mind Je 316; — 7. upon = in addition to: w. y¹saf Dt 199; šeqer ±al šeqer lie upon lie Je 420; l¹qaµ ±al take (as a wife) in addition to Gn 289; therefore ±al is used w. verbs of preferring, surpassing; g¹bar ±al surpass Gn 4926; — 8. above = against, face to face w.: niqrâ ±¹lênû meet with us Ex 318; implies weight, predominance, but shades into °el; — 9. k®±al: k®±al-kœl according to all Is 637; — 10. m¢±al from (upon), down from Gn 2464, off (from) Jb 199; l¢k m¢±¹lay get away from me! Ex 1028; m¢±al l® up over Jon 46; ±ad m¢±al to above Ez 4120; — 11. conj.: ±al-b®lî in that … not Gn 3120; ±al lœ° because … not Ps 119136, although … not Is 539; ±al-°­šer because Ex 3235; ±al kî because Dt 3117. (pg 273)

 

Let’s take a hard look at Daniel 4:14, paying particular attention to the Hebrew word “qaddisin.” You may cross reference with the following link: http://biblehub.com/interlinear/daniel/4-17.htm See also the following link to further your cross referencing and look for the entry next to reference number 1922: http://www.studylight.org/lexicons/hebrew/hwview.cgi?n=6948 Let us also look at the Hebrew word “iyr.” You may also cross reference in with the following link: http://biblehub.com/interlinear/daniel/4-17.htm  See also the following link to further cross reference: (http://www.studylight.org/lexicons/hebrew/hwview.cgi?n=5894). The English, Hebrew transliterated, and Hebrew words are highlighted. See the Holladay entries starting from right to left: Hol 9811; Hol 9871; Hol 9670, Hol 9504; Hol 9888; Hol 9954

This sentence is decreed by the Watchers; This verdict is commanded by the Holy Ones So that all creatures may know That the Most High is sovereign over the realm of man, And He gives it to whom He wishes And He may set over it even the lowest of men (Dan 4:14 TNK).

14 Big•zërat `îrîn Pit•gämä´ ûmë´mar qaDDîšîn šü´ë|l•tä´ `ad-Dib•rat Dî yin•Dü`ûn Hayyayyä´ Dî|-šallî† (`illäyä´) [`illä´â] Bümal•kût (´énôšä´) [´ánäšä´] ûlüman-Dî yic•Bë´ yiTTüninnah ûšüpal ´ánäšîm yüqîm (`álayyah) [`ála|h] (Dan 4:14 BHT)

14 בִּגְזֵרַ֤ת עִירִין֙ פִּתְגָמָ֔א וּמֵאמַ֥ר קַדִּישִׁ֖ין שְׁאֵֽלְתָ֑א עַד־דִּבְרַ֡ת דִּ֣י יִנְדְּע֣וּן חַ֠יַּיָּא דִּֽי־שַׁלִּ֙יט )עִלָּיָא] (עִלָּאָ֜ה[ בְּמַלְכ֣וּת )אֱנוֹשָׁא] (אֲנָשָׁ֗א[ וּלְמַן־דִּ֤י יִצְבֵּא֙ יִתְּנִנַּ֔הּ וּשְׁפַ֥ל אֲנָשִׁ֖ים יְקִ֥ים )עֲלַיַּהּ] (עֲלַֽהּ[׃ (Dan 4:14-15 WTT) See below WTM and Holladay entries beginning from right to left

B. particle preposition hr’zEG> noun common feminine singular construct

Hol9437 hr’zEG>
*hr’zEG>: Heb. = : cs. tr;zEG>, f.: decree Dn 414•21. † (pg 401)
Hol9381 B.
B.: Heb. = : sf. yBi, %B’, HBe, HB;, !AhB.: prep.: — 1. in: place where Dn 228; µ­l¹q b® a share in Ezr 416; time when Dn 228; — 2. into &c.: place to which Dn 238, ±­dâ b® come to = touch Dn 327; — 3. through, by (means of) Dn 230; b® of price, for (the price of) Ezr 717; — 4. of accompanying condition: b®µedwâ with joy Ezr 616; — 5. oth. connections: š¹tâ b® drink from (= Heb.) Dn 52; hêmîn b® believe in 624; š®l¢t b® rule over 238; ±­bad b® = treat 432; yôm b®yôm day by day Ezr 69; — 6. comb., « rt;aB’ & wG:. (pg 399)

ry[i noun common masculine plural absolute

Hol9811 ry[i
ry[i: Heb. r[e n. pers.: pl. !yriy[i: awake > watcher > angel Dn 410•14•20. † (pg 416)

singular determined a’ particle article

Hol0
Hol9871 ~g”t.Pi
~g”t.Pi: Heb. = : det. am’g”t.Pi: — 1. word: h­tîb pitg¹m, reply Dn 316, give an account of Ezr 511; š®laµ pitg¹m, report Ezr 417 57; — 2. decree Dn 414 Ezr 611. † (pg 418)

noun common masculine singular construct

Hol9670 rm;ame
*rm;ame: Heb. rm’a]m;: cs. = : word, order Dn 414 Ezr 69. † (pg 409)
Hol9504 w>
w>, W: Heb. = : treated like Heb. in vocalization & usage, conj., and; betw. 3 or more words it is either betw. all, Dn 26; before the last 2, Dn 237; or is distributed irregularly, Dn 32; or absent Dn 227; spec. uses: a) and specifically Ezr 68; b) intensifying, and also Dn 629; c) adversatively, but Dn 26; d) or Ezr 726; e) explanatory, for Dn 422; f) continuing, then; oft. to be omitted in transl., after impv. Dn 24, impf. 27; after narrative pf. (= Heb. impf. consec.) Dn 529, w. impf. 42, w. pt. 27; g) expressing purpose w. impf. 52, w. pt. 213, w. inf. 216.
(pg 404)

vyDIq; adjective masculine plural absolute

Hol9888 vyDIq;
vyDiq;: Heb. vAdq’: pl. !yviyDiq;, cs. yveyDiq;: holy: gods Dn 45f•15 511; noun = angels 414, ±îr w®qaddîš 410•20; pl. = Isr. 721, qaddîšê ±elyônîn 718 •22•25 & ±am qaddîšê ±elyônîn 727. † (pg 418)

hl’aev. noun common feminine singular determined a’ particle article

Hol0
Hol9954 hl’aev.
*hl’aev.: Heb. = : det. at’l.aev.: request, question Dn 414 (oth.: matter, affair). † (pg 421)

d[; particle preposition hr’b.DI noun common feminine singular construct

Hol9454 hr’b.DI
*hr’b.Di: Heb. = : cs. tr;b.Di: affair, matter: ±al-dibrat dî = ±ad-dibrat dî, to the end that = in order that Dn 230 414. † (pg 401)
Hol9797 d[;
d[;: Heb. II d[;: — 1. prep. up to, until: a) spatial, up to Dn 713, ±ad-k¹° thus far 728; quantitative Ezr 722; b) temporal, until Dn 615 Ezr 424, ±ad-k®±an until now Ezr 516; up to (thirty days) = during Dn 68; ±ad-°oµ¯rên at last Dn 45; — 2. conj. until: w. impf. Ezr 421; ±ad dî w. impf. Dn 29; w. pf. Dn 234; l¹° … ±ad dî not … until = hardly, scarcely 625. (pg 415)
Hol9462 yDI
yDi, D. in « awhD: = Heb. hz<, Wz: orig. demonstr., then particle of relation: — 1. mark of gen. after det. noun: šall° dî malk¹° Dn 215; after indeterminate noun, n®har dî nûr¹° 710; if both nouns are det., oft w. proleptic sf., š®m¢h dî °®l¹h¹° his name, i.e. God’s 38; material, r¢°šâ dî dah­b¹° the head of gold 238, r¢°š¢h dî d­hab his head was of gold 233; — 2. introducing a rel. clause (Heb. °­šer): a) after a noun, hêk®l¹° dî bîrûš®lem the temple in Jerus. Dn 52; dî as subj. 419, as obj. 226; = what, that which 223; kol-dî everything that Ezr 723; followed by noun w. sf., dî š®m¢h whose name Dn 45 ; phr.: b®±idd¹n¹° dî as soon as Dn 35, °­tar dî Ezr 63 « °­tar; followed by pers. pron.: dî hî° that is Ezr 615, dî °innîn who are Dn 717; b) after interr. pron.: man-dî Dn 36, mâ/m¹° dî 228 ( = Heb. mî °­šer, mah-šše); c) in other comb.: dî … tammâ where Ezr 61; dî l¢h are his Dn 220; dî l¹° titµabbal indestructible Dn 627; w. inf., dî l¹° l®hašn¹yâ irrevocable 69; dî-l¹° without Ezr 69, dî l¹° bîdayin without human assistance; — 3. conj., not alw. distinguishable fm. 2 (cf. Heb. °­šer & kî): a) that after vb. of knowing Dn 28, hearing Ezr 514 &c.; w. ±­tîd, ready to Dn 315; min-q®šo‰ dî, it pertains to the truth that = truly 247; w®dî whereas 241; kol-q¯b¢l dî, just as 241; b) introduces dir. discourse (Heb. kî 7.) Dn 225; c) purpose, so that, in order that Dn 43, = inf. Ezr 610; dî l¹° so that … not, lest Dn 218, = dî-l®mâ Ezr 723; d) result, so that Ezr 510; e) causal, for, because Dn 220; f) w. prep: a) k®dî (Heb. ka°­šer) as Dn 243, when 37; ß) min-dî after Ezr 423; as soon as, to the extent that Dn 423; because 322; g) ±al/±ad-dibrat dî, « *dibrâ; ±ad-dî « ±ad; loq¯b¢l dî, « q¯b¢l. (pg 402)

person masculine plural

Hol9594 [d;y>
[d;y>: Heb. = : peal: pf. Œy, T'[.d;y>, t[ed.yI; impf. [D;n>Ti, [D;n>ai, pl. !W[D.n>yI; impv. [D;; pt. [d;y”, pl. !y[id.y”), cs. y[ed.y”), pass. [;ydiy>: know, w. dî Dn 28f, w. acc. 222 Ezr 725; = learn, w. dî Dn 611 Ezr 415; = understand, w. dî Dn 414, w. acc. 230, abs. 523; y®dî­± leh®w¢° let it be known Dn 323 Ezr 412f.

hafel: pf. [d;Ah, an”[.d;Ah, sf. %[‘d.Ah, ynIT;[.d;Ah, an”T,ñ[.d;Ah Dn 223; impf. [d;Ahy>, pl. !W[d.Ahy>, !W[d.AhT., sf. ynIN:ò[id.Ahy>, ynIN:ò[id.AhT., HNE[id.Aha], ynIN:ò[ud.Ahy>, ynIN:ò[ud.AhT.; inf. h[‘d’Ah, sf. ynIt;ñW[d’Ah, ynIT;ñ[ud’Ah, %t’W[d’Ah; pt. pl. !y[id.Ahm.: let s.one know, communicate to Dn 25 Ezr 510, w. dî Ezr 416, instruct Ezr 725. (pg 407)

determined homonym 1 a’ particle article

Hol0
Hol9543 yx;
yx;: Heb. = : cs. = , det. aY”x;; pl. !yYIx;, cs. yYEx;, det. aY”Y:x;: — 1. living, alive, of God Dn 621; pl. w/o noun = (all) men Dn 230; — 2. !yYIx; life † Dn 712 Ezr 610. (pg 404)

Hol9983 jyLiv;
jyLiv;: Heb. = : det. aj’yLiv;; pl. !¿yÀjiyLiv;: — 1. mighty, powerful Dn 210; w. b®, governing Ezr 420; lord, master over Dn 414•22•29 521; abs. 423; noun: officer 215, ruler 529; — 2. w. l® & inf., it is authorized, permitted Ezr 724. † (pg 423)
Hol9462 yDI
yDi, D. in « awhD: = Heb. hz<, Wz: orig. demonstr., then particle of relation: — 1. mark of gen. after det. noun: šall° dî malk¹° Dn 215; after indeterminate noun, n®har dî nûr¹° 710; if both nouns are det., oft w. proleptic sf., š®m¢h dî °®l¹h¹° his name, i.e. God’s 38; material, r¢°šâ dî dah­b¹° the head of gold 238, r¢°š¢h dî d­hab his head was of gold 233; — 2. introducing a rel. clause (Heb. °­šer): a) after a noun, hêk®l¹° dî bîrûš®lem the temple in Jerus. Dn 52; dî as subj. 419, as obj. 226; = what, that which 223; kol-dî everything that Ezr 723; followed by noun w. sf., dî š®m¢h whose name Dn 45 ; phr.: b®±idd¹n¹° dî as soon as Dn 35, °­tar dî Ezr 63 « °­tar; followed by pers. pron.: dî hî° that is Ezr 615, dî °innîn who are Dn 717; b) after interr. pron.: man-dî Dn 36, mâ/m¹° dî 228 ( = Heb. mî °­šer, mah-šše); c) in other comb.: dî … tammâ where Ezr 61; dî l¢h are his Dn 220; dî l¹° titµabbal indestructible Dn 627; w. inf., dî l¹° l®hašn¹yâ irrevocable 69; dî-l¹° without Ezr 69, dî l¹° bîdayin without human assistance; — 3. conj., not alw. distinguishable fm. 2 (cf. Heb. °­šer & kî): a) that after vb. of knowing Dn 28, hearing Ezr 514 &c.; w. ±­tîd, ready to Dn 315; min-q®šo‰ dî, it pertains to the truth that = truly 247; w®dî whereas 241; kol-q¯b¢l dî, just as 241; b) introduces dir. discourse (Heb. kî 7.) Dn 225; c) purpose, so that, in order that Dn 43, = inf. Ezr 610; dî l¹° so that … not, lest Dn 218, = dî-l®mâ Ezr 723; d) result, so that Ezr 510; e) causal, for, because Dn 220; f) w. prep: a) k®dî (Heb. ka°­šer) as Dn 243, when 37; ß) min-dî after Ezr 423; as soon as, to the extent that Dn 423; because 322; g) ±al/±ad-dibrat dî, « *dibrâ; ±ad-dî « ±ad; loq¯b¢l dî, « q¯b¢l. (pg 402)

yL'[i adjective masculine singular determined kethib a’ particle article kethib

Hol0
Hol9816 yL'[i
*yL'[i: det. Qr ha’L'[i Kt ay”L'[i: superior, highest: phr. °®l¹h¹° ±ill¹°â the most high God Dn 326•32 518•21, ±ill¹°â alone in this mng. 414•21f•29•31 725, cf. « Heb. !Ayl.[,. † (pg 416)

yL'[i adjective masculine singular determined qere a’ particle article qere

Hol0
Hol9816 yL'[i
*yL'[i: det. Qr ha’L'[i Kt ay”L'[i: superior, highest: phr. °®l¹h¹° ±ill¹°â the most high God Dn 326•32 518•21, ±ill¹°â alone in this mng. 414•21f•29•31 725, cf. « Heb. !Ayl.[,. † (pg 416)

B. particle preposition Wkl.m; noun common feminine singular construct

Hol9698 Wkl.m;
Wkl.m;: Heb. tWkl.m;: cs. tWkl.m;, det. at’Wkl.m; & Dn 244 428 724•27 ht’-, sf. ytiWkl.m;, %t’Wkl.m;, HteWkl.m;; pl. cs. tw”k.l.m;, det. at’w”k.l.m;: — I. kingship, sovereignty Dn 237, bêt malkû royal residence 427, hêkal malkût¹° royal palace 426, kors¢° malkût¢h his royal throne 520; — 2. (period of) reign † Dn 629 Ezr 424 615; — 3. (not easily distinguished fm. 1.) kingdom, realm Dn 239 Ezr 713; malkût °­n¹š¹° Dn 414, of God 333. (pg 411)
Hol9381 B.
B.: Heb. = : sf. yBi, %B’, HBe, HB;, !AhB.: prep.: — 1. in: place where Dn 228; µ­l¹q b® a share in Ezr 416; time when Dn 228; — 2. into &c.: place to which Dn 238, ±­dâ b® come to = touch Dn 327; — 3. through, by (means of) Dn 230; b® of price, for (the price of) Ezr 717; — 4. of accompanying condition: b®µedwâ with joy Ezr 616; — 5. oth. connections: š¹tâ b® drink from (= Heb.) Dn 52; hêmîn b® believe in 624; š®l¢t b® rule over 238; ±­bad b® = treat 432; yôm b®yôm day by day Ezr 69; — 6. comb., « rt;aB’ & wG:. (pg 399)

vn”a/ noun common masculine singular determined kethib a’ particle article kethib

Hol0
Hol9343 vn”a/
vn”a/, *vAna/: cs. =, det. av’n”a], av’Ana/ Dn 413f Kt; pl. ~yvin”a] 414: — 1. sg. det. coll. mankind Dn 413f; people of a particular country Ezr 411; malkût °­n¹š¹° Dn 414, z®ra± °­n¹š¹° 243; benê °­n¹š¹° 238 men (as individuals), bar °®n¹š (a single) man 713; — 2. (a single) man (i.e. person) Dn 210; kol-°®n¹š everyone 310. (pg 398)

vn”a/ noun common masculine singular determined Ed:Yathir readings in L which WTS has designated as Qeres when both Dothan and BHS list a Qere. qere a’ particle article Ed:Yathir readings in L which WTS has designated as Qeres when both Dothan and BHS list a Qere. qere

Hol0
Hol9343 vn”a/
vn”a/, *vAna/: cs. =, det. av’n”a], av’Ana/ Dn 413f Kt; pl. ~yvin”a] 414: — 1. sg. det. coll. mankind Dn 413f; people of a particular country Ezr 411; malkût °­n¹š¹° Dn 414, z®ra± °­n¹š¹° 243; benê °­n¹š¹° 238 men (as individuals), bar °®n¹š (a single) man 713; — 2. (a single) man (i.e. person) Dn 210; kol-°®n¹š everyone 310. (pg 398)

w> particle conjunction l. particle preposition !m; pronoun interrogative no gender no number yDI particle relative

Hol9462 yDI
yDi, D. in « awhD: = Heb. hz<, Wz: orig. demonstr., then particle of relation: — 1. mark of gen. after det. noun: šall° dî malk¹° Dn 215; after indeterminate noun, n®har dî nûr¹° 710; if both nouns are det., oft w. proleptic sf., š®m¢h dî °®l¹h¹° his name, i.e. God’s 38; material, r¢°šâ dî dah­b¹° the head of gold 238, r¢°š¢h dî d­hab his head was of gold 233; — 2. introducing a rel. clause (Heb. °­šer): a) after a noun, hêk®l¹° dî bîrûš®lem the temple in Jerus. Dn 52; dî as subj. 419, as obj. 226; = what, that which 223; kol-dî everything that Ezr 723; followed by noun w. sf., dî š®m¢h whose name Dn 45 ; phr.: b®±idd¹n¹° dî as soon as Dn 35, °­tar dî Ezr 63 « °­tar; followed by pers. pron.: dî hî° that is Ezr 615, dî °innîn who are Dn 717; b) after interr. pron.: man-dî Dn 36, mâ/m¹° dî 228 ( = Heb. mî °­šer, mah-šše); c) in other comb.: dî … tammâ where Ezr 61; dî l¢h are his Dn 220; dî l¹° titµabbal indestructible Dn 627; w. inf., dî l¹° l®hašn¹yâ irrevocable 69; dî-l¹° without Ezr 69, dî l¹° bîdayin without human assistance; — 3. conj., not alw. distinguishable fm. 2 (cf. Heb. °­šer & kî): a) that after vb. of knowing Dn 28, hearing Ezr 514 &c.; w. ±­tîd, ready to Dn 315; min-q®šo‰ dî, it pertains to the truth that = truly 247; w®dî whereas 241; kol-q¯b¢l dî, just as 241; b) introduces dir. discourse (Heb. kî 7.) Dn 225; c) purpose, so that, in order that Dn 43, = inf. Ezr 610; dî l¹° so that … not, lest Dn 218, = dî-l®mâ Ezr 723; d) result, so that Ezr 510; e) causal, for, because Dn 220; f) w. prep: a) k®dî (Heb. ka°­šer) as Dn 243, when 37; ß) min-dî after Ezr 423; as soon as, to the extent that Dn 423; because 322; g) ±al/±ad-dibrat dî, « *dibrâ; ±ad-dî « ±ad; loq¯b¢l dî, « q¯b¢l. (pg 402)
Hol9701 !m;
!m;: Heb. II !m’ ‘what’: — I. interr. pron., who ? Ezr 53; man-hû° °®l¹h dî who is a god who = what god? Dn 315; man-°innûn š ®m¹h¹t who (= what) are the names? Ezr 54; — 2. rel. pron. whoever Dn 36•11, l®man-dî (to) whomever 414 521. (pg 412)
Hol9652 l.
l.: Heb. = : sf. yli, %l’, Hle, Hl;, an”l;ñ, ~kol. & Dn 34 !Akl.; ~Ahl. Je 1011 & ~hol. & !Ahl. & Dn 721 !hol.: prep., in genl. equivalent to Heb. l®, but also to Heb. °el & ±al: — 1. in- dicating direction or aim of movement Dn 217; — 2. temporal, liqƒ¹t at the end of Dn 426•31, l®±¹l®mîn for ever 24; — 3. indicating purpose, (which I have built) as, for (a royal residence) Dn 427 Ezr 69, w. h­wâ become Dn 235; — 4. w. inf. after vbs. of going, sending, saying, being able &c., to Dn 29 Ezr 422; — 5. w. inf. after l¹° to express prohibition: l¹° l®hašn¹yâ not to be changed Dn 69; — 6. w. pers. obj., (tell) (to) (s.one) Dn 24; at beginning of letters, w/o vb. Dn 331 Ezr 57; — 7. ‘dat. of ref.’ Dn 49 Ezr 610; — 8. dat of. possession, belong to = possess Dn 616 Ezr 416; — 9. oth. relationships: w. resemble Dn 75, corresponding to Ezr 617; — 10. as periphrasis for gen. Ezr 55; — II. in dates: yôm … lîraµ Ezr 615; š®nat … l® Dn 71 Ezr 424; — 12. replaces pers. obj. (acc.) Dn 212 Ezr 52; neuter obj. Dn 234 Ezr 412, indeterminate † Dn 210 ; — 13. introduces emphatic appos., ‘to wit’ Ezr 725; — 14. compounds, « gô°, mâ, ±ad, q¯bel. (pg 409)
Hol9504 w>
w>, W: Heb. = : treated like Heb. in vocalization & usage, conj., and; betw. 3 or more words it is either betw. all, Dn 26; before the last 2, Dn 237; or is distributed irregularly, Dn 32; or absent Dn 227; spec. uses: a) and specifically Ezr 68; b) intensifying, and also Dn 629; c) adversatively, but Dn 26; d) or Ezr 726; e) explanatory, for Dn 422; f) continuing, then; oft. to be omitted in transl., after impv. Dn 24, impf. 27; after narrative pf. (= Heb. impf. consec.) Dn 529, w. impf. 42, w. pt. 27; g) expressing purpose w. impf. 52, w. pt. 213, w. inf. 216.
(pg 404)

abc verb peal imperfect 3rd person masculine singular

Hol9874 hbc
hbc: peal: pf. 1. sg. tybic.; impf. aBec.yI, Dn 521 hBec.yI; inf. sf. HyEB.c.mi; pt. abec’: — 1. long to, desire to, w. l® & inf. Dn 719; — 2. wish, like Dn 414•22•29 519•21, k®miƒb®y¢h according to his will 432. † (pg 418)

!tn verb peal imperfect 3rd person masculine singular suffix 3rd person feminine singular energic nun

Hol9770 !tn
!tn: Heb. = : peal: (pf., impv. & pt. supplied by bh;y>); impf. -!Ten>yI, !Ten>Ti, pl. !WnT.n>yI, sf. HN:nIT.yI; inf. !T;n>mi: give Dn 216 414•22•29, defray Ezr 720, pay off (taxes) 413. † (pg 414)

w> particle conjunction lp;v. adjective masculine singular construct

Hol10003 lp;v.
*lp;v.: Heb. lp’v’: cs. = : low(ly), š®fal °­n¹šîm the lowliest of men Dn 414. † (pg 424)
Hol9504 w>
w>, W: Heb. = : treated like Heb. in vocalization & usage, conj., and; betw. 3 or more words it is either betw. all, Dn 26; before the last 2, Dn 237; or is distributed irregularly, Dn 32; or absent Dn 227; spec. uses: a) and specifically Ezr 68; b) intensifying, and also Dn 629; c) adversatively, but Dn 26; d) or Ezr 726; e) explanatory, for Dn 422; f) continuing, then; oft. to be omitted in transl., after impv. Dn 24, impf. 27; after narrative pf. (= Heb. impf. consec.) Dn 529, w. impf. 42, w. pt. 27; g) expressing purpose w. impf. 52, w. pt. 213, w. inf. 216.
(pg 404)

vn”a/ noun common masculine plural absolute

Hol9343 vn”a/
vn”a/, *vAna/: cs. =, det. av’n”a], av’Ana/ Dn 413f Kt; pl. ~yvin”a] 414: — 1. sg. det. coll. mankind Dn 413f; people of a particular country Ezr 411; malkût °­n¹š¹° Dn 414, z®ra± °­n¹š¹° 243; benê °­n¹š¹° 238 men (as individuals), bar °®n¹š (a single) man 713; — 2. (a single) man (i.e. person) Dn 210; kol-°®n¹š everyone 310. (pg 398)

person masculine singular

Hol9892 ~wq
~wq: Heb. = : peal: pf. ~q’, pl. Wmq’ñ; impf. ~Wqy>, pl. !WmWqy> & Dn 724 !Wmquy>; impv. f. ymiWqñ; pt. ~aeq’, pl. Kt !ymia]q'( Qr !ymiy>q'( det. aY”m;a]q'(: — 1. stand up, rise up Dn 324 620 75, arise 239 717•24; set about, begin Ezr 52; — 2. stand (i.e. be standing) Dn 231 33 710•16; — 3. endure, continue Dn 244. †

pael: inf. hm’Y”q;: set up, metaph. establish (a statute) Dn 68. †

(h)afel: pf. ~yqeh] & Dn 62 ~yqih]w:, 2. T’m.yqeñh] 1. tm,yqeñh]; pl. Wmyqiñh], sf. Hmeyqih/ & Dn 31 (afel) Hmeyqia]; impf. ~yqiy> & Dn 521 616 ~yqeh’y>, ~yqiT.; inf. sf. HteWmq’h]; pt. ~yqeh’m.: — 1. set up (a statue) Dn 31-3 •5•7•12•14•18; — 2. establish (a kingship) Dn 244; — 3. appoint (kings, officials) Dn 221, w. 2 acc. 511, w. acc. & b® Ezr 618, w. acc. & ±al Dn 414 521 62•4; — 4. establish (a statute) Dn 69•16. †

hofal: pf. 3. f. tm;¿yÀqih\: be set up Dn 74f. † (pg 418)

person feminine singular kethib

Hol9812 l[;
l[;: Heb. = : sf. yl;[], %yIl;[] Kt %l'[] Qr, Hy:l;[] Kt Hl;[] Qr, an”yl,[], ~hoyle[] & !Ahyle[]: prep., = Heb. ±al & °el: — 1. (up)on: a) at rest Dn 210 Ezr 515; on (one’s neck) = around Dn 57; b) motion, on (to) Dn 234 Ezr 55; — 2. over, e.g. (appointed) over (the administration) Dn 249, so (kings were) over (Jerusalem) Ezr 420 &c. w. var. vbs.; m®‰¹° ±al fall to (s.one) Dn 421 ; — 3. against Dn 319 Ezr 419; — 4. toward (= Heb. °el, w. vb. of motion) Dn 224 Ezr 412; in epistolary style, to Ezr 411; — 5. relating to the mind, w. ´îm ‰®±¢m Dn 312 & ´îm b¹l 615; (be pleasing) to 424 Ezr 517; — 6. concerning Dn 218 Ezr 48, for = on behalf of Ezr 617; ±al-mâ why? Dn 215, ±al-d®nâ therefore Ezr 415, in this matter Dn 316 Ezr 422; — 7. in comparison, above Dn 64, ±al dî more than 319. (pg 416)

l[; particle preposition suffix 3rd person feminine singular qere

Hol9812 l[;
l[;: Heb. = : sf. yl;[], %yIl;[] Kt %l'[] Qr, Hy:l;[] Kt Hl;[] Qr, an”yl,[], ~hoyle[] & !Ahyle[]: prep., = Heb. ±al & °el: — 1. (up)on: a) at rest Dn 210 Ezr 515; on (one’s neck) = around Dn 57; b) motion, on (to) Dn 234 Ezr 55; — 2. over, e.g. (appointed) over (the administration) Dn 249, so (kings were) over (Jerusalem) Ezr 420 &c. w. var. vbs.; m®‰¹° ±al fall to (s.one) Dn 421 ; — 3. against Dn 319 Ezr 419; — 4. toward (= Heb. °el, w. vb. of motion) Dn 224 Ezr 412; in epistolary style, to Ezr 411; — 5. relating to the mind, w. ´îm ‰®±¢m Dn 312 & ´îm b¹l 615; (be pleasing) to 424 Ezr 517; — 6. concerning Dn 218 Ezr 48, for = on behalf of Ezr 617; ±al-mâ why? Dn 215, ±al-d®nâ therefore Ezr 415, in this matter Dn 316 Ezr 422; — 7. in comparison, above Dn 64, ±al dî more than 319. (pg 416)

It must be carefully noted that it seems to be the case that the Hebrew words in question “qaddisin” and “iyr” refer to angels as in heavenly beings. However, there needs to be careful consideration given to the context of Isaiah 14:12-15 and Ezekiel 28:14-15. In the context of these verses it can be understood that satan wanted to exalt himself to the same level of ELOHIYM, ruling as ELOHIYM does from ELOHIYM’s throne. The throne of ELOHIYM represents ELOHIYM’s authority. This being said, the context of this verse forces us to strongly agree that it does not seem to make sense that satan would want to be in the same seat of authority and dethrone ELOHIYM if that would mean that he wants only to dethrone the angelic counsel (elohiym) from the seat of authority of elohiym (the angelic counsel). In other words, why would satan be accused of being lifted up and exalting himself and want to usurp the authority of angelic beings like unto himself in like authority if that would not elevate him to a higher authority than the authority of ELOHIYM.

12 How are you fallen from heaven, O Shining One, son of Dawn! How are you felled to earth, O vanquisher of nations!
13 Once you thought in your heart, “I will climb to the sky; Higher than the stars of God I will set my throne. I will sit in the mount of assembly, On the summit of Zaphon:
14 I will mount the back of a cloud — I will match the Most High.”
15 Instead, you are brought down to Sheol, To the bottom of the Pit. (Isa 14:12-15 TNK)

Where would that get him? The answer is that it would get him absolutely no where. What is in question is the use of the plural form of eloah which is elohiym. Is it referring to ELOHIYM (Lord God) or elohiym (angels)? Therefore a counsel of angels may exist but it does not mean that ELOHIYM is not plural simply because the context of Isaiah 14:12-15 and Ez 28:14-16 forces us to see that the authority satan is seeking after is not the authority of angelic beings like himself meaning that the Lord God is ELOHIYM (not The Lord God seeking counsel every time His plural name ELOHIYM is used) which is the plural form of Eloah. The angelic counsel does exist but according to the scriptures there is clear communication between the Lord God and them. For instance, when the Lord God asked a question directed to the angelic counsel, the angelic counsel answered directly (1 Kings 22: 19-23). See below.

19 But Micaiah said, “I call upon you to hear the word of the LORD! I saw the LORD seated upon His throne, with all the host of heaven standing in attendance to the right and to the left of Him.
20 The LORD asked, ‘Who will entice Ahab so that he will march and fall at Ramoth-gilead?’ Then one said thus and another said thus,
21 until a certain spirit came forward and stood before the LORD and said, ‘I will entice him.’ ‘How?’ the LORD asked him.
22 And he replied, ‘I will go out and be a lying spirit in the mouth of all his prophets.’ Then He said, ‘You will entice and you will prevail. Go out and do it.’
23 So the LORD has put a lying spirit in the mouth of all these prophets of yours; for the LORD has decreed disaster upon you.”
(1Ki 22:19-23 TNK)

So if one takes the position that satan does not have to consult the angelic counsel, were he to be in the same authority of ELOHIYM, who or what would he be the high (G)od over? Taking this position is a poor one to defend because all the rest of the angels would have to be swept under the rug so to speak simply because ELOHIYM, when used to refer to God in connection with what He says in the plural, can only mean He is consulting His angels. You would have ELOHIYM ruling over elohiym with no consultation going on between them, satan also disagreeing with that theological position by virtue of his revealed intent to be like ELOHIYM.

 14 I created you as a cherub With outstretched shielding wings; And you resided on God’s holy mountain; You walked among stones of fire.

15 You were blameless in your ways, From the day you were created Until wrongdoing was found in you.
16 By your far-flung commerce You were filled with lawlessness And you sinned. So I have struck you down From the mountain of God, And I have destroyed you, O shielding cherub, From among the stones of fire. (Eze 28:14-16 TNK)

14 ´aºTT•-Kürûb mim•šaH hassôkëk• ûnütaTTîºkä Bühar qöºdeš ´élöhîm häyîºtä Bütôk• ´ab•nê-´ëš hit•halläºk•Tä
15 Tämîm ´aTTâ Bid•räkʺkä miyyôm hiBBä|r•´äk• `ad-nim•cä´ `aw•läºtâ Bäk•
16 Büröb rükullät•kä mälû tôkükä Hämäs wa|TTeHé†ä´ wä´eHallel•kä mëhar ´élöhîm wä|´aBBed•kä Kürûb hassökëk• miTTôk• ´ab•nê-´ëš
(Eze 28:14-16 BHT)

14 אַ֙תְּ־כְּר֔וּב מִמְשַׁ֖ח הַסּוֹכֵ֑ךְ וּנְתַתִּ֗יךָ בְּהַ֙ר קֹ֤דֶשׁ אֱלֹהִים֙ הָיִ֔יתָ בְּת֥וֹךְ אַבְנֵי־אֵ֖שׁ הִתְהַלָּֽכְתָּ׃

15 תָּמִ֤ים אַתָּה֙ בִּדְרָכֶ֔יךָ מִיּ֖וֹם הִבָּֽרְאָ֑ךְ עַד־נִמְצָ֥א עַוְלָ֖תָה בָּֽךְ׃

16 בְּרֹ֣ב רְכֻלָּתְךָ֗ מָל֧וּ תוֹכְךָ֛ חָמָ֖ס וַֽתֶּחֱטָ֑א וָאֶחַלֶּלְךָ֩ מֵהַ֙ר אֱלֹהִ֤ים וָֽאַבֶּדְךָ֙ כְּר֣וּב הַסֹּכֵ֔ךְ מִתּ֖וֹךְ אַבְנֵי־אֵֽשׁ׃
(Eze 28:14-17 WTT) See WTM and Holladay entry below pertaining to gold highlighted words above “elohiym.”

~yhil{a/ noun common masculine plural absolute

Hol454 H;Ala/
H;Ala/ & ~yhil{a/: I. H;Ala/ (ca. 60 ×), H;l{a/ Dt 3217, 2K 1731 Kt, Hb 111f, Dn 1138 †; most oft. in Jb (41 ×): — 1. a God/god Ps 1832, kœl-°®lœ­h any god Dn 1137, lœ° °®lœ­h non-god(s) Dt 3217; — 2. the true God Jb 34.

(pg 17)

Hol455 ~yhil{a/
II. ~yhil{a/ ( 2250 ×), with waw Ps 1847 14310 1451 †; cs. yhel{a/, sf. yh;l{a/, wyh’l{a/, ~h,yhel{a/, Amyheñl{a/; w. pref. ~yhil{aBe, ŒawE, ŒaKe, Œale; but Œa/me Ps 86 (« !mi): — 1. gods, kœl-°®lœhê miƒrayim Ex 1212, °®lœhê h¹°®lœhîm God of gods Dt 1017, °®lœhîm °­µ¢rîm (64 ×, « °aµ¢r), b®nê(h¹) °®lœhîm Gn 62 sons of the gods (oth.: sons of God) Jb 16 21 387, †, cf. b®nê °¢lîm; — 2. as a sg.: God, Deity; a) fm. the form, occasionally construed as pl., hit±û °®lœhîm Gn 2013, °®lœhîm µayyîm living God Dt 523; b) construed as sg., yhwh hû° h¹°®lœhîm it is Y. who is God Dt 435; occurs both w. & w/o def. art. w/o difference of mng.; euphony & free choice?; c) God/god or goddess of a people, land, °®lœhê yi´r¹°êl Ex 51, ±aštoret °®lœhê ƒidœnîm 1K 115; d) God/god of a specific domain: °®lœhê hašš¹mayim & °®l. h¹°¹reƒ Gn 243, °®l. kœl-b¹´¹r Je 3227; w. qualifying gen.: °®lohê ±ô1¹m Is 4028 ; e) God/god of individual: of David 2K 205, °®lœhê °¹bî Gn 3142; — 3. misc. a) h¢bî° °et-hadd®b¹rîm °el-h¹°®lœhîm bring cases before God (for judgment) Ex 1819; b) Moses is l¢°lœhîm for Aaron (has the place of God) Ex 416; c) a spirit of the dead 1S 2813; d) w. or w/o art., like a proper noun, equivalent to & interchanging w. yhwh, difficult to distinguish from appellative use; in Ps 42–83 °®lœhîm is mostly a substitute for yhwh; e) °®lœhîm superlative? rû­µ °®lœhîm mighty wind Gn 12, n®´î° °®lœhîm mighty prince Gn 236. (pg 17)

See below Rodkinson Babylonian Talmud Vol 8 Tract Sanhedrin Part 2 (Haggada) pp 369-372.

R. Jehudah said in the name of Rabh: At the time the Holy One, blessed be He, was about to create a man, He created a coetus of angels, and said to them: Would ye advise me to create a man? And they asked Him: What will be his deeds? And He related before them such and such. They explained before Him: Lord of the Universe, what is the mortal, that Thou rememberest him, and the son of men, that Thou thinkest of him? [Ps. 7.5]. He then put His little finger among them and they were all burnt. And the same was with the second coetus. The third one, however, said before Him: O Creator of the world! the first angels who protested, did they effect? The whole world is Thine, and all what it is pleased before Thee Thou mayest do. Thereafter at the time of the generation of the flood and the generation of dispersion whose deeds were criminal, the same angels said before Him: Creator of the Universe, were not the first angels right with their protest? And He answered: “And even unto old age I am the same, and even unto the time of hoary hairs will I hear” [Isa. 46.4].

R. Jehudah said again in the name of the same authority: Adam the first was from one end of the world to the other, as it reads [Deut. 4.32]: “Since the day that God created Adam upon the earth, and from the one end of the heavens unto the other end.” After he had sinned, the Holy One, blessed be He, laid His hand upon him and reduced him [Ps. 139.5]. “Behind and before hast Thou hedged me in, and Thou placest upon me Thy hand.” R. Elazar said: Adam the first was tall from the earth to the sky, as the above cited verse: “The day Adam was created upon the earth and to one end of the heaven.” And when he sinned He laid His hand upon him, and diminished him, as the cited verse [Ps. 139.] reads.

R. Jehudah said again in the name of Rabh: Adam the first spoke with the Aramaic language, as [ibid., ibid. 17]: “And how precious are unto me thy thoughts,” and the terms in the original Psalm are Aramaic. And this is what Resh Lakish said: It reads [Gen. 5.1]: “This is the book of the generation of Adam.” Infer from this that the Holy One, blessed be He, showed to Adam every generation with its scholars, every generation with its lecturers. And when Adam saw the generation of R. Aqiba, he was pleased with his wisdom, but was dejected seeing his death, and said: “How precious are unto me thy thoughts.”

The same said again in the name of the same authority: The Minnim1 of this generation say that Adam the first was also of their sect. And they infer it from [Gen. 3.9]: “And the       God called unto Adam and said unto him: Where art thou?” i.e., to what is thy heart inclined?

Said R. Johanan: Every place where the Minnim gave their wrong interpretation, the answer of annulling it is to be found in the same place–e.g., they claim from [Gen. 1.26]: “Let us make man.” Hence it is in plural. However, in [ibid. 27] it reads: “And God created man in his image” (singular). [Ibid. 11.7]: “Let us go down” (plural); however, (cont)[ibid., ibid. 5]: “And the Lord came down” (singular). [Ibid. 35.7]: “And there God appeared” (the term in Hebrew is plural); however [ibid., ibid. 3]: “Unto the Lord who answered me” (singular). [Deut. 4.7]: “For what great nation is there that hath gods so nigh unto it?” However, it reads farther on, “as is the Lord our God every time we call upon him.” [II Lam. 7.23]: “Which God went?” (the term in Hebrew is plural). However [Dan. 7.9]: “I was looking down until chairs were set down, and the Ancient of days seated himself” (singular). But why are all the above-mentioned written in plural? This is in accordance with R. Johanan, who said elsewhere that the Holy One, blessed be He, does not do anything until he consults the heavenly household, as it reads [ibid. 4.14]: “Through the resolve of the angels is this decree, and by the order of the holy ones is this decision.” However, this answer is for all the plurals mentioned, except the last one, “the chairs.” Why are they in plural? One for Him and one for David. So R. Aqiba in a Boraitha. Said R. Elazar b. Azaryah to him: Aqiba, how do you dare to make the Shekhina common? It means one chair for judgment and one for mercy. Did Aqiba accept this, or not? Come and hear the following Boraitha: One for judgment and one for mercy. So R. Aqiba. Said R. Elazar b. Azaryah to him: Aqiba, what hast thou to do with Haggada? Give thy attention to Negain and Ohaloth. It means one for a chair to sit upon and one for a footstool.

Said R. Na’hman. He who knows to give a right answer to the Minnim like R. Aidith may discuss with them, but he who is not able to do so, it is better for him that he discuss not with them at all. There was a Min who said to R. Aidith: It reads [Ex. 24.1]: “Come up unto the Lord.” It ought to be, “Come up to me.” (And when God said to him: Come up to the Lord, there must be one lord more?) And he answered: That is the angel Mattatron (name of the chief of the angels) about whom ibid. 23.20 speaks, as he bears the name of his master [ibid., ibid. 21]: “Because my name is in him.” If so, rejoined the Min, let us worship him. It reads, ibid., ibid., ibid., al tamer be, and this term means also “exchange.” Hence it means thou shalt not exchange him for Me.

Said the Min again: But does it not read “he will not pardon your transgression”? And Aidith answered: Believe me, that even as a guide we refused to accept him, as it reads (cont)[ibid. 33.15]: “If thy presence go not (with us), carry us not up from here.”

A Min asked Ismael b. R. Jose: It reads [Gen. 19.24]: “And the Lord rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah brimstone and fire. From the Lord,” etc. From the Lord! It ought to be from Him (hence there was one more lord).

As we consider this, let me bring to your attention the following verse from the Psalms Targum English. “A psalm of David. Give praise in the presence of the LORD, O bands of angels;1 give glory and might in the LORD’s presence.” (Psa 29:1 Psalms Targum English) PST Notes (Psa 29:1) Notes:  (1) Bands of angels: sons of gods. Notice in the above note from Psa 29:1 in PST that there is the use of the plural form of the word god. Does this imply that God has a pluralistic nature? I say this because the word above “gods” doesn’t seem to make sense if you take it to refer to the word “sons” above in the Psa 29:1 PST notes, simply because of the word “of” meaning from. The question begs to be asked, how could gods be the parents and the children at the same time?

Before we enter into the other side of the debate let’s take a hard look at Psalm 29:1 in the Leningrad Hebrew Old Testament with Westminster Hebrew Old Testament Morphology and Holladay entry below with translation starting from right to left. See also the following link if you wish to cross reference the Hebrew word “el” found below with the highlight in gold. http://www.studylight.org/lexicons/hebrew/hwview.cgi?n=410 It is in this prior link that one can see the idea of the older ox being yoked to the younger less experienced ox by the yoke to aid in the comprehension of the Trinity. See the following link to cross reference the Hebrew word “ben” found below highlighted in silver. http://www.studylight.org/lexicons/hebrew/hwview.cgi?n=1121  The analogy I’d like to put forth is that of The Father God and the Son God being yoked together by the yoke of the Holy Spirit God. It is in this light that one can begin to scratch the surface when trying to understand The Trinity God-head. The 1st being The Father, the 2nd being The Son, and the 3rd being The Holy Spirit that provides the spiritual synergy to the Dynamic Trio. You may also cross reference the Leningrad Hebrew Old Testament with the Hebrew Bible Transliterated immediately below. 

miz•môr lüdäwìd häbû lyhwh(la|´dönäy) Bünê ´ëlîm häbû lyhwh(la´dönäy) Käbôd wä`öz (Psa 29:1 BHT)

 מִזְמ֗וֹר לְדָ֫וִ֥ד הָב֣וּ לַֽ֭יהוָה בְּנֵ֣י אֵלִ֑ים הָב֥וּ לַ֜יהוָ֗ה כָּב֥וֹד וָעֹֽז׃ (Psa 29:1 WTT)

rAmz>mi noun common masculine singular absolute

Hol4435 rAmz>mi
rAmz>mi: psalm Ps 31. (pg 189)

l. particle preposition dwID’ noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol1760 dwID’
dwID’, later dywID’: n. pers., David.

(pg 69)
Hol3984 l.
I l.: exc. w. sf., alw. proclitic; before consonant w. shewa, li-; otherw. follows next vowel: la±­mœd, le°®hœb, loµ¯lî; before accented syl., l¹-: l¹bé‰aµ, l¹zeh, w. monosyl.

inf., l¹t¢t (but l®t¢t before gen. Gn 163, also l®µœm lô Hg 16) & l¹TÄtet, but l®tittî; special cases: rmoale, hwhyl;; syncope of h betw. 2 vowels w. art.: l®hammelek > lammelek, l®h¹rœ°š > l¹rœ°š, occasionally w. inf. nif. l®h¢r¹°ôt > l¢r¹°ôt & hif. l®hamrôt > lamrôt; w. sf.: Al (15 ×, acc. to M.T., written al{, also aL{), Hl’ (hl’ Nu 324 Zc 511 Rt 114), ^l. (hk’l. Gn 2737 2S 1822 Is 36), %l'(, f. %l’ & ykil’ñ 2K 42 & SS 213 (Qr %l’), yli, ~h,l’, hM’heñl’ & « Aml’ñ, !h,l’, hN”heñl’ (!hel’ Rt 113), ~k,l’ f. hn”k,ñl’ Ez 1318 (!k,l’ never appears), Wnl’ñ; alw. prep., expressing existence or action towards, over against, or for s.thg or s.one: — 1. spatial: to, towards: movement in a given direction (arrival at a destination not at issue): lammizraµ to the east Ne 326, l®f¹nîm forward Je 724; p¹nâ l®darkô turn to his own way Is 536; — 2. to (expressing arrival at destination): l¹°¹reƒ to the ground Ps 4426, q¹rab laššaµat comes near to the Pit Jb 3322; — 3. temporal: a) until: labbœqer Dt 164, lammœ±¢d 1S 138, l®±ôl¹m forever Gn 322; b) at, in: l®±¢t ±ereb at the time of evening, in the eve. Gn 811, l®rû­µ hayyôm in the cool of the evening Gn 38; l®yôm p®quddâ on the day of … Is 103, lamm¹‰¹r during rain Je 1013; w. inf. l®da±tô when he knows Is 715; c) for a time > for a duration: l®y¹mîm ±ôd šib±â after 7 more days Gn 74, lišn¹tayim after 2 years 2S 1323; — 4. direction (no physical movement): niksaftâ l®bêt you long for the house of Gn 3130; he°®mîn l¹hem feel secure toward them = believe them Je 4014; — 5. therefore w. vbs. of saying, of, about: °imrî lî say of me Gn 2013; l®±ittîm … nibb¹° prophesy of times … Ez 1227; therefore in superscriptions: lann®bî°îm concerning the prophets Je 239; — 6. intention, purpose of an action: office or station to which s.one is appointed (in Eng. into, … to be …, or 2 acc.): ±¹´â l® Gn 122, n¹tan l® 176, ´¹m l® Is 520 all: make s.one s.thg; b¹nâ l® build out into Gn 222; material or obj. into which s.thg is made: ´¹raf l® burn to (lime) Am 21; so sim. l®lœ°-l¹h as if they were not hers Jb 3916; l®°akz¹r (have become) s.thg cruel La 43; — 7. ‘dat. of advantage, disadvantage,’ indicating the pers. for whose (dis)advantage an action is performed: a) ‰ôb lô good w. regard to = good for him, an advantage to him Jb 103; h¢nî­µ l¹kem grant safety for you Dt 1210; so w. vbs. of giving, inflicting, sending, &c.; b) mar l¹h, bitter for her La 14; (means of salvation) for = against: l®µa‰‰¹°t ûl®niddâ against sin & uncleanness Zc 131; c) in the interest of, in favor of: h¹yâ l¹nû was for us Ps 1241; — 8. ‘ethical dat.’: pers. ref. same as subj. of vb., emphasizing the interest or share the subj. has in the action; oft. omitted in Eng. transl.: wayy¢lek lô he went (for himsf.) Ex 1827, watt¢šeb l¹h Gn 2116; oft. w. impv. lek-l®k¹, go Gn 121, b®raµ l®k¹, flee 2743; — 9. expresses belonging (to a given party, group, leader): h¢mmâ l®y¹rob±¹m are of (the people of) Jeroboam 1K 1411, lœ° °ehyeh l¹kem I am not concerned w. you Ho 19; — 10. > ‘dat. of possession’: y¢š lî & °ên lî I (do not) have > (elliptical) lî ‘belongs to me’: lô hayy¹m the sea is his Ps 955; — 11. preparation, disposition, fitness: yôm l®yhwh, a day (prepared) for Y. Is 212, l¹kem l®da±at it is your affair to know Mi 31, lœ° l¹kem it is not your affair Ezr 43, l®yhwh hayšû±â help lies w. Y. Ps 39, l¹°¹d¹m (does not) lie w. man = in the power, disposition of man Je 1023; °al lamm®l¹kîm it is not for kings = kings are not to (drink wine) Pr 314; °ên lî kesef, it is not a matter of (silver) 2S 214; — 12. expresses result, product of an action: wayhî h¹°¹dam l®nefeš µayyâ changed into a living being Gn 27, wayyiben yhwh °et-haƒƒ¢l¹± l®°iššâ into a woman 222; wayy¢ƒ¢° l®µofšî go out as a free man Ex 212; — 13. genitive-relationship for indef. nouns: b¢n l®yišay a son of Jesse 1S 1618, °œh¢b l®d¹wid a friend of D. 1K 515, mizmôr l®d¹wid Ps 31 & oft.; — 14. thus l® replaces gen. a) after a noun or noun-substitute wh. cannot be (specifically) in the cs.: °aµat l¹hem one of them Ez 16, š®nat š®tayim l®d¹r®y¹weš = in the 2nd year of D. Hg 11, dimkem l®nafšœtêkem your own blood Gn 95; b) instead of 2 gens.: dibrê hayy¹mîm l®malkê of the kings of 1K 1531; — 15. reinforces a prep.: mittaµat l® Gn 17, s¹bîb l® Ex 1613; — 16. expressing w. a noun an adverbial phrase of situation, manner: l¹rœb in abundance Gn 4816, l¹‰œhar in clearness Ex 2410; w. sf. l®°ittî I comfortably Gn 3314, l®baddô he alone 4420; — 17. distributive: a) w. sg. repeated: labbœqer labbœqer, every morning 1C 927; b) w. pl.: lirg¹±îm every moment Is 273; — 18. specification: expresses that in respect to wh. s.thg is affirmed: in (regard to), concerning: l®±œšer (excelled everyone) in riches 1K 1023, l®m¹tôq (like honey) in sweetness Ez 33; lô with ƒiwwâ concerning him Est 32; ? > l® of comparison: ƒ¹±îr lihyôt too little to be Mi 51, ‰ôbîm… l®rê­µ sweeter than… SS 13; — 19. indicates the composition of the whole by sections: according to, by: l®mînô according to its kind Gn 111, ûl®°alfêkem and by your 1000’s 1S 1019 , h¹°¹reƒ l®°ark¹h ûl®roµb¹h the land by ( = in) its length & breadth Gn 1317; — 20. in the later period, like Aram., l® (in relation to, in the direction of) may introduce the logical dir. obj., usu. pers.: w. q¹r¹° Gn 15, l¹qaµ Je 402, ±¹zab 1C 1637 &c.; — 21. in mng. namely, logical apposition: l®malkê namely the kings of Je 118; l®kol-k®lê specifically all the utensils of Ex 2719 ; — 22. introduces cause or reason: for, because of: lifƒ®±î for wounding me Gn 423, l®rekeb Is 369; — 23. w. pass. vbs. introduces the originator of the action (subj. of corresponding active vb.): b¹rûk °abr¹m l®°¢l blessed be A. by God Gn 1419, nibµar l®kœl is preferred by all Je 83; — 24. used w. labels, inscriptions, but best omitted in transl.: l®mah¢r š- Is 81, lîhûdâ Ez 3716; — 25. l® w. inf., expressing: a) purpose: lir°ôt (in order) to see Gn 115, lihyôt °alm¹nôt š®l¹l¹m (different subj.) in order that widows might be their spoil Is 102; b) completion of incomplete verbal ideas: after y¹kœl be able to Gn 451 °¹bâ want to Ex 1027, µ¹f¢ƒ delight to Ju 1323, µ¹dal cease Ps 364; c) a more precise determination of the governing vb., translated adverbially: hê‰îb lir°ôt see rightly Je 112, hirbâ la±­´ôt do much 2K 216, higdîl la±­´ôt do s.thg great Jl 221; d) accompanying circumstance: liš°ôl (know that your wickedness is great) in that you asked 1S 1217; l®l¢dâ (no strength) that one might bring forth (children) Is 373; l¢°môr namely (« I °¹mar 2.); e) h¹yâ w. l® & inf.: wayhî lidrôš he aimed to seek 2C 265, wayhî lisgœr was to be closed Jos 25, w®h¹yâ l®b¹±¢r is to be grazed off Is 55; f) after y¢š: y¢š l®dabb¢r it is necessary to speak 2K 413; y¢š l®yhwh l¹tet l®k¹ Y. can give you 2C 259; g) after lœ°, l® & inf.: lœ° l®hityaµ¢š was not to be registered 1C 51, lœ° l¹ƒ¢°t no one may ( = is to) carry 1C 152; h) l® & inf. as the vb. of an indep. clause, equivalent to saying that s.thg will, must, is to happen: meh la±­´ôt what can one do? 2K 413, ma lla±­´ôt what was there ( = would there have been) to do? Is 54; wayhî haššemeš l¹bô° was setting Gn 1512; l®hakkôt you should have struck 2K 1319; — i) time: lifnôt ±ereb toward evening Gn 2463, lifnôt bœqer Ex 1427. (pg 169)

II l.: emphatic, vocative: is evident e.g. be-
fore impv.: l®hôšî±¢nî do save me! Is 3820; before subj., for emphasis: l®yhwh maginn¢nû yes, Y. is our shield Ps 8919, kîl®keleb µay hû° ‰ôb for certainly a living dog is better … Ec 94; before pred.: bat-±ammî l®°akz¹r is certainly cruel La 43; for reinforcement: l®kol-n¹dîb everyone who is willing 1C 2821; to sum up at the end of a narrative: l®sîµôn … l®±ôg namely S. & Og Ps 13510f; this l® is oft. debatable, or identified w. I l® 20.; written al{ 1S 209 2K 526. (pg 170)

bhy verb qal imperative masculine plural

Hol1922 bh;
I bh;: impv. hb’h’ñ, Gn 2921 hb’ñh’ before a, yLi-hb’h'( & aN”-hb’h'(; ybih’, Wbh’ w. uncertain stress; — 1. impv. give Gn 2921; hab hab Pr 3015; f. Ru 315; pl. Gn 4716; h¹bû l¹kem provide Dt 113; — 2. interj. h¹TÄbâ come on! w. 1 sg. Gn 3816, w. coh. pl. Gn 113f•7. (pg 76)
II *bh; elephant (?), « ~yBih;n>v,. (pg 76)

l. particle preposition hwhy noun proper no gender no number no state

l. particle preposition hwhy noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol3193 hwhy
hwhy: the name of God, first in Gn 24; Qr yn”doa], hence printed texts hw”hy>; for pronunciation (almost certainly yahweh), etymology, occurrence &c. see comm. & theologies; w. prep. hwhyB;, ŒK;, Œl;; hwhyw:. (pg 130)
Hol3984 l.
I l.: exc. w. sf., alw. proclitic; before consonant w. shewa, li-; otherw. follows next vowel: la±­mœd, le°®hœb, loµ¯lî; before accented syl., l¹-: l¹bé‰aµ, l¹zeh, w. monosyl.
inf., l¹t¢t (but l®t¢t before gen. Gn 163, also l®µœm lô Hg 16) & l¹TÄtet, but l®tittî; special cases: rmoale, hwhyl;; syncope of h betw. 2 vowels w. art.: l®hammelek > lammelek, l®h¹rœ°š > l¹rœ°š, occasionally w. inf. nif. l®h¢r¹°ôt > l¢r¹°ôt & hif. l®hamrôt > lamrôt; w. sf.: Al (15 ×, acc. to M.T., written al{, also aL{), Hl’ (hl’ Nu 324 Zc 511 Rt 114), ^l. (hk’l. Gn 2737 2S 1822 Is 36), %l'(, f. %l’ & ykil’ñ 2K 42 & SS 213 (Qr %l’), yli, ~h,l’, hM’heñl’ & « Aml’ñ, !h,l’, hN”heñl’ (!hel’ Rt 113), ~k,l’ f. hn”k,ñl’ Ez 1318 (!k,l’ never appears), Wnl’ñ; alw. prep., expressing existence or action towards, over against, or for s.thg or s.one: — 1. spatial: to, towards: movement in a given direction (arrival at a destination not at issue): lammizraµ to the east Ne 326, l®f¹nîm forward Je 724; p¹nâ l®darkô turn to his own way Is 536; — 2. to (expressing arrival at destination): l¹°¹reƒ to the ground Ps 4426, q¹rab laššaµat comes near to the Pit Jb 3322; — 3. temporal: a) until: labbœqer Dt 164, lammœ±¢d 1S 138, l®±ôl¹m forever Gn 322; b) at, in: l®±¢t ±ereb at the time of evening, in the eve. Gn 811, l®rû­µ hayyôm in the cool of the evening Gn 38; l®yôm p®quddâ on the day of … Is 103, lamm¹‰¹r during rain Je 1013; w. inf. l®da±tô when he knows Is 715; c) for a time > for a duration: l®y¹mîm ±ôd šib±â after 7 more days Gn 74, lišn¹tayim after 2 years 2S 1323; — 4. direction (no physical movement): niksaftâ l®bêt you long for the house of Gn 3130; he°®mîn l¹hem feel secure toward them = believe them Je 4014; — 5. therefore w. vbs. of saying, of, about: °imrî lî say of me Gn 2013; l®±ittîm … nibb¹° prophesy of times … Ez 1227; therefore in superscriptions: lann®bî°îm concerning the prophets Je 239; — 6. intention, purpose of an action: office or station to which s.one is appointed (in Eng. into, … to be …, or 2 acc.): ±¹´â l® Gn 122, n¹tan l® 176, ´¹m l® Is 520 all: make s.one s.thg; b¹nâ l® build out into Gn 222; material or obj. into which s.thg is made: ´¹raf l® burn to (lime) Am 21; so sim. l®lœ°-l¹h as if they were not hers Jb 3916; l®°akz¹r (have become) s.thg cruel La 43; — 7. ‘dat. of advantage, disadvantage,’ indicating the pers. for whose (dis)advantage an action is performed: a) ‰ôb lô good w. regard to = good for him, an advantage to him Jb 103; h¢nî­µ l¹kem grant safety for you Dt 1210; so w. vbs. of giving, inflicting, sending, &c.; b) mar l¹h, bitter for her La 14; (means of salvation) for = against: l®µa‰‰¹°t ûl®niddâ against sin & uncleanness Zc 131; c) in the interest of, in favor of: h¹yâ l¹nû was for us Ps 1241; — 8. ‘ethical dat.’: pers. ref. same as subj. of vb., emphasizing the interest or share the subj. has in the action; oft. omitted in Eng. transl.: wayy¢lek lô he went (for himsf.) Ex 1827, watt¢šeb l¹h Gn 2116; oft. w. impv. lek-l®k¹, go Gn 121, b®raµ l®k¹, flee 2743; — 9. expresses belonging (to a given party, group, leader): h¢mmâ l®y¹rob±¹m are of (the people of) Jeroboam 1K 1411, lœ° °ehyeh l¹kem I am not concerned w. you Ho 19; — 10. > ‘dat. of possession’: y¢š lî & °ên lî I (do not) have > (elliptical) lî ‘belongs to me’: lô hayy¹m the sea is his Ps 955; — 11. preparation, disposition, fitness: yôm l®yhwh, a day (prepared) for Y. Is 212, l¹kem l®da±at it is your affair to know Mi 31, lœ° l¹kem it is not your affair Ezr 43, l®yhwh hayšû±â help lies w. Y. Ps 39, l¹°¹d¹m (does not) lie w. man = in the power, disposition of man Je 1023; °al lamm®l¹kîm it is not for kings = kings are not to (drink wine) Pr 314; °ên lî kesef, it is not a matter of (silver) 2S 214; — 12. expresses result, product of an action: wayhî h¹°¹dam l®nefeš µayyâ changed into a living
being Gn 27, wayyiben yhwh °et-haƒƒ¢l¹± l®°iššâ into a woman 222; wayy¢ƒ¢° l®µofšî go out as a free man Ex 212; — 13. genitive-relationship for indef. nouns: b¢n l®yišay a son of Jesse 1S 1618, °œh¢b l®d¹wid a friend of D. 1K 515, mizmôr l®d¹wid Ps 31 & oft.; — 14. thus l® replaces gen. a) after a noun or noun-substitute wh. cannot be (specifically) in the cs.: °aµat l¹hem one of them Ez 16, š®nat š®tayim l®d¹r®y¹weš = in the 2nd year of D. Hg 11, dimkem l®nafšœtêkem your own blood Gn 95; b) instead of 2 gens.: dibrê hayy¹mîm l®malkê of the kings of 1K 1531; — 15. reinforces a prep.: mittaµat l® Gn 17, s¹bîb l® Ex 1613; — 16. expressing w. a noun an adverbial phrase of situation, manner: l¹rœb in abundance Gn 4816, l¹‰œhar in clearness Ex 2410; w. sf. l®°ittî I comfortably Gn 3314, l®baddô he alone 4420; — 17. distributive: a) w. sg. repeated: labbœqer labbœqer, every morning 1C 927; b) w. pl.: lirg¹±îm every moment Is 273; — 18. specification: expresses that in respect to wh. s.thg is affirmed: in (regard to), concerning: l®±œšer (excelled everyone) in riches 1K 1023, l®m¹tôq (like honey) in sweetness Ez 33; lô with ƒiwwâ concerning him Est 32; ? > l® of comparison: ƒ¹±îr lihyôt too little to be Mi 51, ‰ôbîm… l®rê­µ sweeter than… SS 13; — 19. indicates the composition of the whole by sections: according to, by: l®mînô according to its kind Gn 111, ûl®°alfêkem and by your 1000’s 1S 1019 , h¹°¹reƒ l®°ark¹h ûl®roµb¹h the land by ( = in) its length & breadth Gn 1317; — 20. in the later period, like Aram., l® (in relation to, in the direction of) may introduce the logical dir. obj., usu. pers.: w. q¹r¹° Gn 15, l¹qaµ Je 402, ±¹zab 1C 1637 &c.; — 21. in mng. namely, logical apposition: l®malkê namely the kings of Je 118; l®kol-k®lê specifically all the utensils of Ex 2719 ; — 22. introduces cause or reason: for, because of: lifƒ®±î for wounding me Gn 423, l®rekeb Is 369; — 23. w. pass. vbs. introduces the originator of the action (subj. of corresponding active vb.): b¹rûk °abr¹m l®°¢l blessed be A. by God Gn 1419, nibµar l®kœl is preferred by all Je 83; — 24. used w. labels, inscriptions, but best omitted in transl.: l®mah¢r š- Is 81, lîhûdâ Ez 3716; — 25. l® w. inf., expressing: a) purpose: lir°ôt (in order) to see Gn 115, lihyôt °alm¹nôt š®l¹l¹m (different subj.) in order that widows might be their spoil Is 102; b) completion of incomplete verbal ideas: after y¹kœl be able to Gn 451 °¹bâ want to Ex 1027, µ¹f¢ƒ delight to Ju 1323, µ¹dal cease Ps 364; c) a more precise determination of the governing vb., translated adverbially: hê‰îb lir°ôt see rightly Je 112, hirbâ la±­´ôt do much 2K 216, higdîl la±­´ôt do s.thg great Jl 221; d) accompanying circumstance: liš°ôl (know that your wickedness is great) in that you asked 1S 1217; l®l¢dâ (no strength) that one might bring forth (children) Is 373; l¢°môr namely (« I °¹mar 2.); e) h¹yâ w. l® & inf.: wayhî lidrôš he aimed to seek 2C 265, wayhî lisgœr was to be closed Jos 25, w®h¹yâ l®b¹±¢r is to be grazed off Is 55; f) after y¢š: y¢š l®dabb¢r it is necessary to speak 2K 413; y¢š l®yhwh l¹tet l®k¹ Y. can give you 2C 259; g) after lœ°, l® & inf.: lœ° l®hityaµ¢š was not to be registered 1C 51, lœ° l¹ƒ¢°t no one may ( = is to) carry 1C 152; h) l® & inf. as the vb. of an indep. clause, equivalent to saying that s.thg will, must, is to happen: meh la±­´ôt what can one do? 2K 413, ma lla±­´ôt what was there ( = would there have been) to do? Is 54; wayhî haššemeš l¹bô° was setting Gn 1512; l®hakkôt you should have struck 2K 1319; — i) time: lifnôt ±ereb toward evening Gn 2463, lifnôt bœqer Ex 1427. (pg 169)
II l.: emphatic, vocative: is evident e.g. be-
fore impv.: l®hôšî±¢nî do save me! Is 3820; before subj., for emphasis: l®yhwh maginn¢nû yes, Y. is our shield Ps 8919, kîl®keleb µay hû° ‰ôb for certainly a living dog is better … Ec 94; before pred.: bat-±ammî l®°akz¹r is certainly cruel La 43; for reinforcement: l®kol-n¹dîb everyone who is willing 1C 2821; to sum up at the end of a narrative: l®sîµôn … l®±ôg namely S. & Og Ps 13510f; this l® is oft. debatable, or identified w. I l® 20.; written al{ 1S 209 2K 526. (pg 170)

!Be noun common masculine plural construct homonym 1

Hol1124 !Be
I !Be (4850 ×): abs. !Be, -!Be 1S 2220 Ez 1810 †; cs. -!B, (!B, Ne 618 1C 921 †, !B,mi before number Nu 825 & oft., !Be Gn 4922) & -!Bi (!Bi Dt 252 †), ynIB. Gn 4911 & AnB. Nu 2318 243•15; sf. AnB., ynIB., ^n>Bi, ^n”)B.; pl. ~ynIB’, cs. ynEB. (note: Ju 2013 Qr w/o Kt), sf. wyn”B’, ykiy>n:b’ Kt & %yIn:B’ Qr, ~h,ynEB.; var. Kt/Qr problems, e.g. Dn 1110 AnB. Kt & wyn”b’ Qr; f. « tB; : — 1. a) son Gn 54; ben-z®qûnîm son conceived in old age Gn 373; b¢n z¹k¹r male child Je 2015, b¹nîm children (incl. daughters) Gn 316, ben-bêtî born in my house Gn 153; b®nî °attâ formula of adoption Ps 27; b®nê °®lœhîm « °®lô­h II 1; — b) young (of an animal): ben-b¹q¹r calf Gn 187, b®nê ƒœ°n lambs Ps 1144; b¹nîm young (birds) Dt 226; — 2. grandson Gn 321; — 3. intimate address to younger comrade, disciple: b®nî 1S 2617•21•25; bink¹, formula of servility, = ‘I’ 2K 89; — 4. w. coll. to indicate an individual: ben-°¹d¹m, human being Ez 21 (93 × in Ez), Dn 817; b®nê °¹d¹m individual men Dt 328, b®nê °ebyôn individual poor Ps 724; — 5. member of a people, tribe: b®nê °®dôm Ps 1377; — 6. member of a group, class, guild, ben-n¹bî° member of a group of prophets Am 714, pl. b®nê hann. 1K 2035; — 7. one belonging to a category, manner, destiny: b®nê m®rî sons of rebellion = rebels Nu 1725; bin hakkôt one deserving to be beaten Dt 252; ben-m¹wet one who deserves death 1S 2031; — 8. in stating s.one’s age, ben-š®mœnat y¹mîm 8 days old Gn 1712; — 9. used in contempt instead of s.one’s own name: son of Jesse 1S 2030f; — 10. metaph.: ben-qešet = arrow Jb 4120; — 2. son to God: Solomon becomes 2S 714, pl. of Isr. Dt 141. (pg 42)
II !Be: n. pers. 1C 1518, but corr. † (pg 42)

 

lae noun common masculine plural absolute homonym 5

Hol436 lae
I lae: « I lyIa; ram, man of power. (pg 15)
II lae: « II lyIa; mighty tree. (pg 15)
III lae: « III lyIa; door-post. (pg 15)
IV lae: strength, power: yeš-l®°¢l y¹dî (l®) it is in my power to Gn 3129; °ên l®°¢ y¹d®k¹ you are powerless Dt 2832. (pg 15)
V lae: sf. yliae (11 ×); pl. ~yliae Ex 1511 ~liae: very old Semitic term for deity, often appearing in compounds with proper names (~yhil{a/ does not make compounds) and liturgal phrases; uneven distribution in OT, most frequent in Ps, Jb, Is, Gn, lacking in many books: — 1. distinct from Y.: a) the high god El Ez 282, kôk®bê °¢l Is 1413, °¢l ±elyôn Gn 1418-22; b) pl. gods (subordinate to Y.) Ex 1511, b®nê °¢lîm Ps 291 — 2. title of Y., claimed by himself: °­nî °¢l Is 4018, °¢l °®lœhê yi´r¹°¢l Gn 3320; — 3. appellation in general phrases, God/god (no sep. f. form), mî °¢l who is a God Mi 718, °¢l °aµ¢r another god Ex 3414, lœ°-°¢l non-god Dt 3221; — 4. God in contrast to man (°¹d¹m or °îš) Ho 119; — 5. (the) God (of Israel), // yhwh Nu 238, // °®lœhîm Jb 58; a) w/o attribute: °¢l yhwh Y. is God Ps 11827 ; alone 2S 235 & oft.; b) h¹°¢l w/o attribute 2S 2231; c) °¢l w. attribute: a) w. gen., in var. phrases: °¢l °®lœhîm Ps 501; « the various attributes, e.g. °¢l bêt-°¢l Gn 357 °¢l b®rît Ju 946; b) w. adj. or pt.: g¹dôl Dt 721, nœ´¢° forgiving Ps 998; d) h¹°¢l w. attribute, h¹gg¹dôl Dt 1017; e) w. pers. ref.: a) w. sf. °¢lî Ex 152; ±imm¹nû °¢l Is 714; ß) appos., h¹±œneh °œtî Gn 353; g) w. gen. °¢l y®šû±¹tî Is 122; f) w. gen. of worshipper, °¢l yi´r¹°¢l Ps 6836; g) cs. phrase of his possession, yad °¢l hand of God Jb 2711; h) ‘superlative’? har®rê °¢l mighty mountains Ps 367. (pg 16)
VI lae: demonstr. pron.: these Gn 198•25 263f + 5 × OT. (pg 16)

bhy verb qal imperative masculine plural

Hol1922 bh;
I bh;: impv. hb’h’ñ, Gn 2921 hb’ñh’ before a, yLi-hb’h'( & aN”-hb’h'(; ybih’, Wbh’ w. uncertain stress; — 1. impv. give Gn 2921; hab hab Pr 3015; f. Ru 315; pl. Gn 4716; h¹bû l¹kem provide Dt 113; — 2. interj. h¹TÄbâ come on! w. 1 sg. Gn 3816, w. coh. pl. Gn 113f•7. (pg 76)
II *bh; elephant (?), « ~yBih;n>v,. (pg 76)

l. particle preposition hwhy noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol3193 hwhy
hwhy: the name of God, first in Gn 24; Qr yn”doa], hence printed texts hw”hy>; for pronunciation (almost certainly yahweh), etymology, occurrence &c. see comm. & theologies; w. prep. hwhyB;, ŒK;, Œl;; hwhyw:. (pg 130)
Hol3984 l.
I l.: exc. w. sf., alw. proclitic; before consonant w. shewa, li-; otherw. follows next vowel: la±­mœd, le°®hœb, loµ¯lî; before accented syl., l¹-: l¹bé‰aµ, l¹zeh, w. monosyl.
inf., l¹t¢t (but l®t¢t before gen. Gn 163, also l®µœm lô Hg 16) & l¹TÄtet, but l®tittî; special cases: rmoale, hwhyl;; syncope of h betw. 2 vowels w. art.: l®hammelek > lammelek, l®h¹rœ°š > l¹rœ°š, occasionally w. inf. nif. l®h¢r¹°ôt > l¢r¹°ôt & hif. l®hamrôt > lamrôt; w. sf.: Al (15 ×, acc. to M.T., written al{, also aL{), Hl’ (hl’ Nu 324 Zc 511 Rt 114), ^l. (hk’l. Gn 2737 2S 1822 Is 36), %l'(, f. %l’ & ykil’ñ 2K 42 & SS 213 (Qr %l’), yli, ~h,l’, hM’heñl’ & « Aml’ñ, !h,l’, hN”heñl’ (!hel’ Rt 113), ~k,l’ f. hn”k,ñl’ Ez 1318 (!k,l’ never appears), Wnl’ñ; alw. prep., expressing existence or action towards, over against, or for s.thg or s.one: — 1. spatial: to, towards: movement in a given direction (arrival at a destination not at issue): lammizraµ to the east Ne 326, l®f¹nîm forward Je 724; p¹nâ l®darkô turn to his own way Is 536; — 2. to (expressing arrival at destination): l¹°¹reƒ to the ground Ps 4426, q¹rab laššaµat comes near to the Pit Jb 3322; — 3. temporal: a) until: labbœqer Dt 164, lammœ±¢d 1S 138, l®±ôl¹m forever Gn 322; b) at, in: l®±¢t ±ereb at the time of evening, in the eve. Gn 811, l®rû­µ hayyôm in the cool of the evening Gn 38; l®yôm p®quddâ on the day of … Is 103, lamm¹‰¹r during rain Je 1013; w. inf. l®da±tô when he knows Is 715; c) for a time > for a duration: l®y¹mîm ±ôd šib±â after 7 more days Gn 74, lišn¹tayim after 2 years 2S 1323; — 4. direction (no physical movement): niksaftâ l®bêt you long for the house of Gn 3130; he°®mîn l¹hem feel secure toward them = believe them Je 4014; — 5. therefore w. vbs. of saying, of, about: °imrî lî say of me Gn 2013; l®±ittîm … nibb¹° prophesy of times … Ez 1227; therefore in superscriptions: lann®bî°îm concerning the prophets Je 239; — 6. intention, purpose of an action: office or station to which s.one is appointed (in Eng. into, … to be …, or 2 acc.): ±¹´â l® Gn 122, n¹tan l® 176, ´¹m l® Is 520 all: make s.one s.thg; b¹nâ l® build out into Gn 222; material or obj. into which s.thg is made: ´¹raf l® burn to (lime) Am 21; so sim. l®lœ°-l¹h as if they were not hers Jb 3916; l®°akz¹r (have become) s.thg cruel La 43; — 7. ‘dat. of advantage, disadvantage,’ indicating the pers. for whose (dis)advantage an action is performed: a) ‰ôb lô good w. regard to = good for him, an advantage to him Jb 103; h¢nî­µ l¹kem grant safety for you Dt 1210; so w. vbs. of giving, inflicting, sending, &c.; b) mar l¹h, bitter for her La 14; (means of salvation) for = against: l®µa‰‰¹°t ûl®niddâ against sin & uncleanness Zc 131; c) in the interest of, in favor of: h¹yâ l¹nû was for us Ps 1241; — 8. ‘ethical dat.’: pers. ref. same as subj. of vb., emphasizing the interest or share the subj. has in the action; oft. omitted in Eng. transl.: wayy¢lek lô he went (for himsf.) Ex 1827, watt¢šeb l¹h Gn 2116; oft. w. impv. lek-l®k¹, go Gn 121, b®raµ l®k¹, flee 2743; — 9. expresses belonging (to a given party, group, leader): h¢mmâ l®y¹rob±¹m are of (the people of) Jeroboam 1K 1411, lœ° °ehyeh l¹kem I am not concerned w. you Ho 19; — 10. > ‘dat. of possession’: y¢š lî & °ên lî I (do not) have > (elliptical) lî ‘belongs to me’: lô hayy¹m the sea is his Ps 955; — 11. preparation, disposition, fitness: yôm l®yhwh, a day (prepared) for Y. Is 212, l¹kem l®da±at it is your affair to know Mi 31, lœ° l¹kem it is not your affair Ezr 43, l®yhwh hayšû±â help lies w. Y. Ps 39, l¹°¹d¹m (does not) lie w. man = in the power, disposition of man Je 1023; °al lamm®l¹kîm it is not for kings = kings are not to (drink wine) Pr 314; °ên lî kesef, it is not a matter of (silver) 2S 214; — 12. expresses result, product of an action: wayhî h¹°¹dam l®nefeš µayyâ changed into a living
being Gn 27, wayyiben yhwh °et-haƒƒ¢l¹± l®°iššâ into a woman 222; wayy¢ƒ¢° l®µofšî go out as a free man Ex 212; — 13. genitive-relationship for indef. nouns: b¢n l®yišay a son of Jesse 1S 1618, °œh¢b l®d¹wid a friend of D. 1K 515, mizmôr l®d¹wid Ps 31 & oft.; — 14. thus l® replaces gen. a) after a noun or noun-substitute wh. cannot be (specifically) in the cs.: °aµat l¹hem one of them Ez 16, š®nat š®tayim l®d¹r®y¹weš = in the 2nd year of D. Hg 11, dimkem l®nafšœtêkem your own blood Gn 95; b) instead of 2 gens.: dibrê hayy¹mîm l®malkê of the kings of 1K 1531; — 15. reinforces a prep.: mittaµat l® Gn 17, s¹bîb l® Ex 1613; — 16. expressing w. a noun an adverbial phrase of situation, manner: l¹rœb in abundance Gn 4816, l¹‰œhar in clearness Ex 2410; w. sf. l®°ittî I comfortably Gn 3314, l®baddô he alone 4420; — 17. distributive: a) w. sg. repeated: labbœqer labbœqer, every morning 1C 927; b) w. pl.: lirg¹±îm every moment Is 273; — 18. specification: expresses that in respect to wh. s.thg is affirmed: in (regard to), concerning: l®±œšer (excelled everyone) in riches 1K 1023, l®m¹tôq (like honey) in sweetness Ez 33; lô with ƒiwwâ concerning him Est 32; ? > l® of comparison: ƒ¹±îr lihyôt too little to be Mi 51, ‰ôbîm… l®rê­µ sweeter than… SS 13; — 19. indicates the composition of the whole by sections: according to, by: l®mînô according to its kind Gn 111, ûl®°alfêkem and by your 1000’s 1S 1019 , h¹°¹reƒ l®°ark¹h ûl®roµb¹h the land by ( = in) its length & breadth Gn 1317; — 20. in the later period, like Aram., l® (in relation to, in the direction of) may introduce the logical dir. obj., usu. pers.: w. q¹r¹° Gn 15, l¹qaµ Je 402, ±¹zab 1C 1637 &c.; — 21. in mng. namely, logical apposition: l®malkê namely the kings of Je 118; l®kol-k®lê specifically all the utensils of Ex 2719 ; — 22. introduces cause or reason: for, because of: lifƒ®±î for wounding me Gn 423, l®rekeb Is 369; — 23. w. pass. vbs. introduces the originator of the action (subj. of corresponding active vb.): b¹rûk °abr¹m l®°¢l blessed be A. by God Gn 1419, nibµar l®kœl is preferred by all Je 83; — 24. used w. labels, inscriptions, but best omitted in transl.: l®mah¢r š- Is 81, lîhûdâ Ez 3716; — 25. l® w. inf., expressing: a) purpose: lir°ôt (in order) to see Gn 115, lihyôt °alm¹nôt š®l¹l¹m (different subj.) in order that widows might be their spoil Is 102; b) completion of incomplete verbal ideas: after y¹kœl be able to Gn 451 °¹bâ want to Ex 1027, µ¹f¢ƒ delight to Ju 1323, µ¹dal cease Ps 364; c) a more precise determination of the governing vb., translated adverbially: hê‰îb lir°ôt see rightly Je 112, hirbâ la±­´ôt do much 2K 216, higdîl la±­´ôt do s.thg great Jl 221; d) accompanying circumstance: liš°ôl (know that your wickedness is great) in that you asked 1S 1217; l®l¢dâ (no strength) that one might bring forth (children) Is 373; l¢°môr namely (« I °¹mar 2.); e) h¹yâ w. l® & inf.: wayhî lidrôš he aimed to seek 2C 265, wayhî lisgœr was to be closed Jos 25, w®h¹yâ l®b¹±¢r is to be grazed off Is 55; f) after y¢š: y¢š l®dabb¢r it is necessary to speak 2K 413; y¢š l®yhwh l¹tet l®k¹ Y. can give you 2C 259; g) after lœ°, l® & inf.: lœ° l®hityaµ¢š was not to be registered 1C 51, lœ° l¹ƒ¢°t no one may ( = is to) carry 1C 152; h) l® & inf. as the vb. of an indep. clause, equivalent to saying that s.thg will, must, is to happen: meh la±­´ôt what can one do? 2K 413, ma lla±­´ôt what was there ( = would there have been) to do? Is 54; wayhî haššemeš l¹bô° was setting Gn 1512; l®hakkôt you should have struck 2K 1319; — i) time: lifnôt ±ereb toward evening Gn 2463, lifnôt bœqer Ex 1427. (pg 169)
II l.: emphatic, vocative: is evident e.g. be-
fore impv.: l®hôšî±¢nî do save me! Is 3820; before subj., for emphasis: l®yhwh maginn¢nû yes, Y. is our shield Ps 8919, kîl®keleb µay hû° ‰ôb for certainly a living dog is better … Ec 94; before pred.: bat-±ammî l®°akz¹r is certainly cruel La 43; for reinforcement: l®kol-n¹dîb everyone who is willing 1C 2821; to sum up at the end of a narrative: l®sîµôn … l®±ôg namely S. & Og Ps 13510f; this l® is oft. debatable, or identified w. I l® 20.; written al{ 1S 209 2K 526. (pg 170)

dAbK’ noun common masculine singular absolute

Hol3675 dAbK’
dAbK’ & 2 × dboK’ (ca. 200 ×): cs. dAbK., sf. AdAbK..

I. non-theological: — 1. weight, burden Is 2224; — 2. a) possessions Gn 311; b) (impressive) appearance, weightiness Gn 453; k®bôdô coll. his nobles Is 513; c) great number Ho 911; — 3. splendor, magnificence: of woods Is 1018, Lebanon Is 352, temple Hg 23; — 4. distinction, respect, mark of honor: a) gift of honor 1S 65, seat of honor 1S 28; b) || riches &c. 1K 313; c) honor: abs. Pr 1533, of Isr. Is 103; d) n¹tan k¹bôd show honor to Pr 268.

II. theological: — 1. give honor to Y. (« I 4. c): a) w. ´îm Jos 719, w. n¹tan Je 1316 &c.; b) Y. is the k¹bôd of the godly &c. Ps 34; Y. is likbôd for Jerus. Zc 29; Y. is Isr.’s k¹bôd Je 211; — 2. k®bôd yhwh: a) fixed phrase, 1K 811, 10 × Ez; power, authority, honor of God, but also connected with manifestations of light; b) oth. expr. for God: k®bôd °¢l Ps 192; melek hakk¹bôd Ps 247-10 &c.; c) as the outward appearance of Y.: appears to elders Dt 524; Moses sees Ex 3313; seen in sanctuary Ps 268, clouds Ex 1610; d) appears at sacrifice Lv 96 & elsewh.; e) manifestations in wider sense: fills the whole earth Is 63, will be set among the nations Ez 3921. (pg 151)

w> particle conjunction z[o noun common masculine singular absolute homonym 1

Hol6175 z[o
z[o, rarely zA[: -z[o, -z[‘, sf. AZ[u, hZO[u, ^Z>[u, ^Z>[‘, ^Z”)[u, %ZE[u, yZI[u, yZI[‘, WnzEA[, ~k,Z>[u, AmZ”[u: — 1. strength, power Is 210; adv. w. strength Ju 521 ; in comb., = strong: migdal-±œz Ju 951 &c.; ±œz p¹n¹yw his stern face Ec 81; — 2. said of God: ±œz yhwh Mi 53 & many comb.; — Note: Koehler-Baumgartner (first edition) proposes a II ±œz ‘protection, refuge, shelter,’ w. forms identical w. I ±œz ‘strength’, but derived fm. ð ±wz ‘take shelter’ rather than fm. ð ±zz ‘be strong’; this proposal has not won acceptance, and recently oth. have sugg. for the cited passages the mng. ‘fortress’; therefore 3. fortress Ps 5918. (pg 269)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

 

 

There are several verses in particular that I would like to point you to. See the following verse: “When the guards of the house become shaky, And the men of valor are bent, And the maids that grind, grown few, are idle, And the ladies that peer through the windows grow dim, (Ecc 12:3 TNK)” Notice there is ONE house and different occupants performing in positions distinct to the others, yet all are of the same household in the preceding verse.See the following Hebrew Bible Transliterated verse 3 of chapter 12 in Ecclesiastes: ” 3 Bayyôm šeyyäzuº`û šöm•rê haBBaºyit wühi|t•`awwütû ´an•šê heHäºyil ûb䆕lû ha††ö|Hánôt Kî mì`뺆û wüHäš•kû härö´ôt Bä´áruBBôt (Ecc 12:3 BHT)” See below the WTT and WTM with Holladay entries.

 3 בַּיּ֗וֹם שֶׁיָּזֻ֙עוּ֙ שֹׁמְרֵ֣י הַבַּ֔יִת וְהִֽתְעַוְּת֖וּ אַנְשֵׁ֣י הֶחָ֑יִל וּבָטְל֤וּ הַטֹּֽחֲנוֹת֙ כִּ֣י מִעֵ֔טוּ וְחָשְׁכ֥וּ הָרֹא֖וֹת בָּאֲרֻבּֽוֹת׃
(Ecc 12:3 WTT)

B. particle preposition   h; particle article   ~Ay noun common masculine singular absolute homonym 1

Hol3240  ~Ay
I ~Ay (2225 ×): cs. = , sf. ^m.Ay, ~m’Ay; du. ~yIm;Ay, ~yIm'(Ay; pl. ~ymiy”, cs. ymey>, ymeyBi, ŒwI, ŒKi, Œmi; sf. wym’y” (wm’y” Je 1711: Qr wym’y”, Kt AmyO); pl. Dn 1213; !ymiy”; pl. cs. tAmy> Dt 327 Ps 9015; loc. hm’ymiñy”; m.: — 1. day (daylight hours, :: night) Gn 822; rû­µ hayyôm (late afternoon breeze) Gn 38; — 2. day of 24 hours: Gn 15; yôm t¹mîm a full day Jos 1013; yôm yôm day by day, every day Gn 3910; var.: yôm w¹yôm Est 34 &c.; k®yôm b®yôm as (he did) every day 1S 1810; lišlœšet y¹mîm on the 3rd day Am 44; d®bar yôm b®yômô what is necessary for each day Ex 513; kol-hayyôm the whole day Is 626, every day Ps 1403; — 3. special days: yôm haššeleg 2S 2320; yôm ‰ôb holiday Est 817, yôm r¹±â fatal day La 121 &c; — 4. day of Y. (eschatological) Am 518; bayyôm hahû° prophetic introductory formula Am 216, « 5d.; — 5. pl.: a) in genl. šib±at y¹mîm 7 days Gn 810; b) acc. of time: y¹mîm some time Gn 404, šib±at y¹mîm for 7 days Ex 136, šib±at hayy¹mîm these 7 days Ex 137; kol-hayy¹mîm for ever Dt 440, w. lœ° never 1S 232; c) miyy¹mîm after a time Ju 114; d) eschatological hinn¢h y¹mîm b¹°îm 2K 2017; — 6. pl. w. more spec. mng.: a) w. gen., y®mê ±ôl¹m Am 911 ; b) w. vb.: y®mê h®yôt (all) the time that he was … 1S 224; c) lifetime: y®mê š®nê µayyéka Gn 478, miyy¹mék¹ as long as you live 1S 2528; time of government y®mê dawîd 2S 211; d) layy¹mîm spec. (end-)time Dn 1014; — 7. pl.: extent of time: a year: a) zebaµ hayy¹mîm yearly offering 1S 121 219 206; season of 4 months 1S 277, presumably also 1K 1715, cf. Gn 2455 404; b) miyy¹mîm y¹mîmâ from year to year, yearly 1S 13 219; c) y¹mîm as appos. after expr. of time: miqq¢s š®n¹tayim y¹mîm after 2 full years Gn 411; µœdeš y¹mîm Gn 2914, y®raµ y¹mîm 2K 1513 a (full) month; — 8. du. yôm °ô yômayim Ex 2121 &c.; — 9. hayyôm: a) on the specific day 1S 14; one day 2K 48; b) this day, today Gn 414; hayyôm hazzeh (just) today 2S 1820; — 10. w. prep.: a) b®yôm: a) w. noun clause: (in the day) when … Ps 1023, when (he spoke) Ex 628; ß) w. inf.: b®yôm ±­´ôt on the day when (Y.) made Gn 24; w. inf. nif. b®yôm hibb¹r®°¹m Gn 52; g) b®yôm ha‰‰¹m¢°/ha‰‰¹hôr when s.thg is (un)clean Lv 1457; b) bayyôm: a) during the day Gn 3140; ß) at once Pr 1216; g) bayyôm hahû° then Gn 1518; d) at the same time Ezr 834; e) bayyôm hazzeh this day Gn 711, b®±eƒem hayyôm hazzeh (just) today 1S 1113; z) bayyôm hahû° eschatological Am 911 « 4. above; c) w. k®: a) k®yôm b®yôm « 2. above; ß) kayyôm today, now Is 584; first Gn 2531; kayyôm hazzeh today, now Gn 5020; kayyôm hahû°, w. lœ° was not a day like it Jos 1014; k®hayyôm just now 1S 913; d) l®yôm w. gen.: on the day of Is 103; e) miyyôm from the day when, since: a) w. inf. Ex 106; ß) w. finite vb.: miyyôm dibbartî since I … Je 362; g) l®mîmê 2K 1925 since; f) w. ±ad: ±ad-hayyôm Gn 1937f, ±ad-hayyôm hazzeh Gn 2633 until today; ±ad ±eƒem hayyôm hazzeh until this very day Lv 2314. (pg 131)
II ~Ay: — 1. wind, storm SS 217, ? Zp 22 (« comm.); — 2. breath, q®šeh hayyôm Jb 3025. † (pg 131)

Hol1918  h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

Hol913  B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)

v; particle relative   [wz verb qal imperfect 3rd person masculine plural

Hol2161  [wz
[wz: qal: impf. W[zUy”; pt. [z”: tremble Ec 123, w. min before Est 59. †

pilp.: pt. ^y[,z>[.z:m.: make tremble, oppress Hb 27. † (pg 87)

Hol8302  v;
v; w. doubling of following cons., v’, v, if doubling impossible, or before ¹ or œ, > v. before ~h, Ec 318; alw. proclitic: 139 ×: Ec 68 ×, SS 32 ×; usage identical w. rv,a]: a) introducing nominal clause after noun: kaµœl še±al like the sand wh. is upon Ju 712; šellî my SS 16, b®šellî for my sake Jon 112; b) introducing verbal clause: šehikkâ who struck down Ps 1358; c) in rel. clause w. deferred adv. or prep. + sf.: še- … b¹h where SS 88, še±i‰‰®râ lô w. wh. she crowned him SS 311; w. preceding k® Ec 127; note also šekkull¹m who all, all of whom SS 42 66; d) after vb. of saying, knowing, &c.: that: š¹°attâ that it is thou Ju 617; ±ad-ša until Ju 57; > for SS 57. (pg 355)

rmv verb qal participle masculine plural construct

Hol8758  rm;v’
rm;v’: qal (420 × ): pf. Œv, rm'(v’, Wrm'(v’, sf. Arm’v., hr’m’v., ( < *Hr’m’v.), ^yTir.m;v., ynIr;m’v.; impf. rmov.yI, -rm’v.yI, hr’m.v.a,, hr’moñv.a, Ps 5910, sf. ^r.m’v.yI, ~rem.v.Ti; impv. rmov., -rm’v., hr’m.v’, Wrm.vi, sf. ynIrem.v’; inf. r¿AÀmov., Arm.v’, ^r.m’v., abs. r¿AÀmov’; pt. rmevo, ~yrim.vo, yrem.vo, sf. ^yr,m.vo, pass. rWmv’, hr’muv.: — 1. watch, guard: obj. garden Gn 215, sheep 1S 1720; šœm¢r habb®g¹dîm the priest who looks after the cultic cleanness of priestly garb 2K 2214; šœm¢r hann¹šîm custodian of harem Est 23; š®mœr nafšô spare his life Jb 26; — 2. š¹mar w. b® 2S 1812, w. °el 1S 2615, w. ±al 1S 2616 be careful about, protect; š¹mar min keep, protect fm. Ps 1217; — 3. save, retain: obj. food Gn 4135, silver or goods Ex 223; obj. d¹b¹r keep in mind Gn 3711; obj. anger Am 111, ellipt. Je 35; — 4. protect > observe, watch 1S 112 Is 4220; š¹mar °el keep patiently observing 2S 1116; š¹mar l® consider 2C 511; — 5. w. a 2nd vb. = do s.thg carefully, attentively: š¹mar w®±¹´â Dt 46 = š¹mar la±­´ôt 51; š¹mar l®dabb¢r speak accurately, faithfully Nu 2312; — 6. keep watch, stand guard: šœm®rîm guards Ju 124, šœm®rîm mišm¹r Ne 1225; w. acc. keep in custody Jb 1014; — 7. w. acc. of thg. observe, keep (an order, agreement, obligation): derek yhwh Gn 1819, b®rît 179; — 8. revere Ps 317.
nif.: pf. rm;v.nI, rm'(v.nI, Wrm'(v.nI; impf. rmeV’yI, Wrme(V’yI; impv. rmeV’hi, rm,V'(hi, yrim.V'(hi, Wrme(V’hi: — 1. be protected Ho 1214; — 2. be on one’s guard, be careful, oft. w. ‘ethical dative’ lô &c., w. min = of, not to Gn 3129, w. b® 2S 2010, w. pen that … not Gn 246, w. °al not to Ex 1028; abs. be on one’s guard, be careful 2K 610; nišmar l®nafšô (or b®-) Dt 415 Je 1721 be on one’s guard, be careful.

piel: pt. pl. ~yriM.v;m.: revere Jon 29. †

hitp.: impf. rMeT;v.a,w”, hr’M.T;v.a,w”: be on one’s guard, be careful 2S 2224 Ps 1824. † (pg 378)

h; particle article   tyIB; noun common masculine singular absolute homonym 1

Hol1052  tyIB;
I tyIB; (2000 ×): cs. tyBe; sf. ytiyBe, ^t.yBe, ~t’yBe; pl. ~yTiB'( (b¹tîm), yTeB'(, sf. ^yT,B'(, AmyTeñB'(; loc. ht’yIB;ñ, ht’y>B'(ñ, cs. ht’yBe Gn 282 (6 ×), m.:

A. house (of mud, brick, stone): — 1. dwelling, oft. a single room for man & animals Ju 1131; — a) bêt hammelek palace & b¹tê h¹±¹m Je 398; °­šer ±al habbayit steward Gn 394, majordomo 4316•19; — b) god’s house, temple: of Dagon 1S 52; of God at Shiloh Ju 1831, in Jerus. 1K 65; > habbayit (in Jerus.) Ez. 417ff; bêt hammaml¹kâ royal temple (at Bethel) Am 713; Y.’s heavenly palace Ps 369; — c) portion of a house of more than one room: b¹tê haqq®d¢šîm, cubicles of male prostitutes, 2K 237; — 2. place to stay: Sheol Jb 1713, halo of a fire Ez 127, spiderweb Jb 814; bêt ±ôl¹m = grave Ec 125; container: b¹tê nefeš perfume-bottles Is 320; b¹tê l®b¹dîm rings for the poles Ex 2527; — 3. the interior: báytâ inwards 1K 725; mibbayit Gn 614; — 4. household, family: a) bêt®kâ = wife/wives, children, servants Gn 71; subdivision of mišp¹µâ Jos 714; y®lîd bayit homeborn slave Gn 1727; — b) bêt par±œh Ph.’s court Gn 504; bêt d¹wîd dynasty of D. 1K 1226; — c) b¹nâ bayit start a household Pr 2427; ±¹´â b¹tîm give blessing of children Ex 121; — 5. bêt °¹b, pl. bêt °¹bôt, paternal family Gn 2438; ell. > °¹bôt Ex 625.

B. In place-names; for details, « comm. & dict. of the Bible: — 1. !w<a’ tyBe, defamation of lae-tyBe; — 2. lae¿-ÀtyBe, gentilic ylia/h’ tyBe; — 3. lc,aeñh’ tyBe; — 4. tyBe laber.a;; — 5. [;Bev.a; tyBe; — 6. l[;B; tyBe !A[m., > !A[m. l[;B;; > !A[m. tyBe; > ![oB.; — 7. yair.Bi tyBe; — 8. hr’B’ tyBe; — 9. rdeG” tyBe; — 10. lG”l.GIh; tyBe; — 11. lWmG” tyBe; — 12. !G”h; tyBe; 13. tyBe ~yIt;l’b.Di; — 14. !AgD’ tyBe; — 15. ~r’h’ tyBe; — 16. !r’h’ tyBe; — 17. hl’g>x’ tyBe; — 18. !n”x’ tyBe; — 19. !¿AÀro¿AÀxo¿-ÀtyBe; — 20. ba’Ay tyBe; — 21. t¿AÀmoyviy>h; tyBe; — 22. rK'( tyBe; — 23. ~r,K,h; tyBe; — 24. tyBe tAab’l.; — 25. ~x,l, tyBe, ~x,l'( tyBe, gentilic ymix.L;h; tyBe; — 26. hr’p.[; tyBe; — 27. aALmi tyBe; — 28. !A[m. tyBe; = l[;B; tyBe !A[m. & !A[m. l[;B;; = ![oB.; — 29. tyBe hk'[]m;; — 30. qx’r.M,h; tyBe; — 31. tyBe tAbK’r.M;h;; — 32. hr’m.nI tyBe; — 33. tyBe !d,[,; — 34. tw<m’z>[; tyBe; — 35. qm,[eh’ tyBe; — 36. tAn[] tyBe; — 37. tn”[] tyBe; — 38. ~y[iroh’ tyBe; — 39. hb’r'[]h’ tyBe; — 40. jl,P, tyBe; — 41. rA[P. tyBe, = rA[P. l[;B; < *rA[P. l[;B; tyBe; — 42. #CeP; tyBe; — 43. rWc tyBe; — 44. bAxr. tyBe; — 45. ~r’h’ tyBe, = !r’h’ tyBe; — 46. bk’re tyBe; — 47. ap’r’ tyBe; — 48. !a’v. tyBe > !v’ tyBe & !v; tyBe; — 49. hJ’Vih; tyBe; — 50. tyBe vm,v,, vm,v'( tyBe; — 51. hm’r.g:AT tyBe; — 52. x;WPT; tyBe. (pg 39)
II *tyIB;: f. of *!yIB;; cs. tyBe: between Ez 419 Jb 817; bêt n®tibôt crossroads Pr 82. (pg 39)

Hol1918  h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

w> particle conjunction   tw[ verb hithpael waw consec perfect 3rd person common plural

Hol6168  tw[
tw[: piel: pf. sf. AtW>[i, ynIt'(W>[i, ynIWtW>[i; impf. tWE[;y>, -tW<[;y> inf. tWE[;: make crooked, pervert Jb 83; falsify (balances) Am 85; mislead Ps 11978.

pual: pt. tW”[um.: what is bent, crooked Ec 115. †

hitp.: pf. WtW>[;t.hi: bend (intrans.) Ec 123. † (pg 269)

Hol2098  w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

vyai noun common masculine plural construct

Hol398  vyai
I vyai (2160 ×): cs. =, sf. yviyai; later pl. ~yviyai Is 533 Ps 1414 Pr 84 †, otherw. ~yvin”a], cs. yven>a;, sf. wyv’n”a], ~k,yven>a;: — 1. man (:: woman) Gn 224, also male of animals Gn 72, man as opp. to animals Ex 117; as opp. to God Gn 3229; male child Gn 41; man as valiant 1S 49; — 2. husband Gn 36, metaph. as God of people Ho 218; — 3. to denote position: a) b®nê °îš those of high rank Ps 493; b) ruler of lower rank, °îš ‰ôb 2S 106•8; — 4. man (as a human being), person: °ammat °îš ordinary cubit Dt 311, b®nê °îš children of men (// b®nê °¹d¹m) Ps 6210, °ereƒ lœ°-°îš land empty of men Jb 3826; — 5. in expr. of station, work: a) appos.: °îš n¹bî° Ju 68; b) w. gen. °îš h¹°­d¹mâ farmer Gn 920; °îš°®lœhîm man of God: °îš h¹°®lœhîm only when the whole phrase is def., 1S 97f :: 91, no specific function, orig. possessor of a spirit; a) in context of prophets: Samuel 1S 96-10; b) in wider sense, Moses Dt 331, David Neh 1224; — 6. pl.: people belonging to s.one, s.thg.: °anšê habbayit servants Gn 3911, °anšê d¹wîd men of D. 1S 233; — 7. sg. or pl. denoting nationality &c., °anšê nîn®w¢h men of N. Jon 35, °îš miƒrî Ex 211; coll. °îš y®hûdâ Is 53; — 8. °îš someone, one Gn 1316, °îš … lœ° Gn 236, °îš … °al Ex 1619 no one; — 9. each (one), °îš µ­lœmô Gn 405; — 10. in expr. of reciprocity: each other, °îš °¹hîw, °îš r¢±¢hû Ex 3227; — 11. each one (in his turn): l®°îš Je 2336 (oth.: 9); °îš °îš Lv 1713 & °îš w®°îš Ps 875 & °îš w¹°îš Est 18 every one (no matter who). (pg 14)
II vyai Pr 1824: « vai. † (pg 14)

h; particle article   lyIx; noun common masculine singular absolute

Hol2499  lyIx;
lyIx; (245 ×): lyIx'(, cs. lyxe, sf. ^l'(yxe, ~l’yxe; pl. ~yliy”x], sf. ~h,leyxe Is 306: — 1. capacity, power: sexual Pr 313, of horse Ps 3317; °¹zar µayil gird onesf. w. strength 1S 24; never of God’s power; — 2. property, wealth: a) in genl. Gn 3429; ±¹´â µayil gain wealth Dt 816; µêl t®mûrâ business profit Jb 2018; > b) °îš µayil wealthy landowner, qualified, fit for military service (« below), brave 1K 142, °anšê µayil Gn 476; ben-µayil of good family, valiant 1S 1452, pl. b®nê-µayil Dt 318; °¢šet-µayil worthy wife Pr 124; c) gibbôr µayil brave man Ju 111; as a designation of class: (large) landowner, obligated to military service & the furnishing of a certain number of men; then valiant man w/o regard to property; — 3. army Ex 144 &c.; µayil g¹dôl Ez 1717, µayil k¹b¢d 2K 614: kol-µêl ±am ûm®dînâ all the armed host of a people & a satrapy Est 811; — 4. (foreign) upper classes of a city (important by virtue of property & military value) Ne 334. (pg 103)

Hol1918  h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

w> particle conjunction   ljb verb qal waw consec perfect 3rd person common plural

Hol1039  ljB
ljB: qal: pf. Wlj.B'(: be idle, inactive Ec 123. † (pg 37)

Hol2098  w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

h; particle article   hn”x]jo noun common feminine plural absolute

Hol3036  hn”x]jo
*hn”x]jo: pl. tAnx]jo: (female) miller, metaph. molar Ec 123. † (pg 123)

Hol1918  h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

yKi particle conjunction homonym 2

Hol3747  yKi
I yKi: scar (from burning) Is 324. † (pg 155)
II yKi: — I. demonstr. particle: — 1. ‘emphatic,’ corroborative, strengthening: a) oft. = yes, indeed: kî rabbâ is certainly great Gn 1820, kî môt t¹mût, yes, you shall surely die 1S 1444; b) introducing positive clauses in an oath (« kî-°im II 1. b), truly Gn 4216; — 2. a) introduces conclusion after condition-clause introduced by °im lœ°: °im lœ° ta°­mînû kî lœ° t¢°¹m¢nû if you are not …, then you will not … Is 79; b) kî °¹z introduces conclusion after a condition introduced by lûl¢°/lûlê: if … had not …, then you would have … Gn 3142; introduced by lu°/lû 2S 197; introduced by °im Jb 1114; c) kî ±attâ introduces a conclusion when the condition is only implied: for then I would have … Jb 313; — 3. kî after a neg. clause: a) rather Gn 35 175 244; b) in a contradicting reply: a) lô° kî no, on the contrary, (you did laugh) Gn 1815b 192 4212b; ß) lô° kî (w/o dagesh lene) no! 1K 322; c) preceding negation only implied Gn 3116; — 4. (nothing …) but, except 1S 1825; — 5. in an objection raised by the speaker: but would he really …? 1K 827.

II. true conj.: — 1. causal (causal clause before main clause): because Gn 314; — 2. causal clause after main clause: for Ps 63; introducing an interpretation Is 57; two reasons, kî … kî for … and Gn 319, kî … w®kî Gn 3311; — 3. a reason, long in existence, is finally recognized, kî ±al-k¢n for that is the reason that Gn 198; as a polite formula Gn 185; — 4. comb. a) kî may be separated from its clause by an °im-clause: kî °im for if 2S 183; b) h­kî is it true that …? 2S 91; h­kî implies a positive answer Gn 2736 2S 2319; h­lœ° kî implying a positive answer 1S 101; c) w®kî introducing a rhetorical qn.: it is true, is it not, that …? 1S 2420; d) °af kî, « °af; e) °ak kî only 1S 89; — 5. introduces an obj.-clause after vb. of seeing, hearing, saying, knowing, believing, remembering, forgetting, rejoicing, regretting &c.: that Gn 110 1K 2115; — 6. obj. of the main clause is identical w. the subj. of the subordinate clause: Gn 14 that it was good (oth.: how good it was); reinforced by hû°, hî° Gn 1214; same anticipation w. time-phrase: I know after my death that = I know that after my death … Dt 3129; kî separated fm. governing vb. Jb 204-5; — 7. introducing direct discourse: wattœ°mer kî š¹ma± and she said, ‘he has heard …’ Gn 2933; — 8. comb. °efes kî, ya±an kî, ±ad-kî, ±al-kî, ±¢qeb kî, taµat kî, « °efes, ya±an &c.; « kî °im; — 9. after a main clause which is neg. or interr. (asking information), kî introduces a subordinate clause of definition & amplification: m®°ûmâ kî (I have not done) anything (which could give cause) that (they should put me …) Gn 4015, « Gn 2010 3136; — 10. temporal, when (almost = if) Gn 412; wayhî kî and it happened that = when Gn 61, w®h¹yâ kî and it will happen that = when Gn 1212; subj. placed before kî (« 6): the daughter of any priest, if = if the dau … Lv 219; — 11. conditional: if, in case: kî °¹martî assuming that I say = when, if I say Jb 713; approaches the true ‘if,’ °im; in casuistic laws, kî introduces the basic case (when), and °im the subsidiary cases (if) Ex 212-5 ; later there seems to be no distinction Nu 519f; — 12. concessive: even when, even though Is 1612; kî gam Ec 414; — 13. modal: as Is 559; — 14. final: kî ya±­leh let him go up 1C 2118. (pg 156)

j[m verb piel perfect 3rd person common plural

Hol4849  j[m
j[m: qal: impf. j[;m.yI, j[‘(m.yI, Wj[]m.yI, Wj[‘(m.Ti; inf. j[om.: — 1. be few Lv 2516 Is 2117; become few Je 296 3019 Ps 10739, diminish Pr 1311; — 2. be too small w. min & inf. Ex 124, appear trifling Ne 932. †

piel: pf. Wj[]mi: become few (of teeth) Ec 123. †
hif.: pf. hj’y[im.hi, ~yTij.[;m.hi; impf. jy[im.y:, Wjy[im.T;, ynIjey[im.T;; pt. jy[im.m;: — 1. gather little, few Ex 1617f Nu 1132, take away ( = deduct) few Nu 358; use few (vessels) 2K 43, give less Ex 3015; — 2. diminish, reduce: make the number few (of people) Lv 2622, (of cattle) Ps 10738; obj. price Lv 2516, inheritance Nu 2654 3354; — 3. (by decrease) destroy(people &c.) Je 1024 Ez 2915. † (pg 206)

w> particle conjunction   $vx verb qal waw consec perfect 3rd person common plural

Hol2940  %v;x’
%v;x’: qal: pf. Œx, Wkv.x'(; impf. %v;x.T,, Wkv.x.y:, hn”k.v;x.T,: — 1. be (come) dim, dark: sun Is 1310, °ôr Jb 186, earth Ex 1015; — 2. become dark (eyes) Ps 6924.

hif.: pf. %yvix.h,, yTiñk.v;x]h;w>; impf. %yvix.y:, %vix.Y:w: Ps 10528; pt. %yvix.m;: — 1. darken Am 58, bring darkness 89; — 2. become dark Ps 13912. (pg 119)

Hol2098  w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

h; particle article   har verb qal participle feminine plural absolute

Hol7694  ha’r’
ha’r’: qal (1140 ×): pf. Œr, ht’a]r’, ht’a'(r’, t’yair’, War’, ~t,yair., Wnyair’, sf. Wha'(r’, ^t.a'(r’, wytiyair.; impf. ha,r.yI, ar,yE, ar.Y:w: ( = hif. impf.), ha,r.Ti, ar,Tew:, haer.Ti Dn 113 War.yI, hn”ya,r.Ti, hN”yaer.Ti Mi 710, unique forms ha,r.YIw: Ez 1828, a,r.YIw: Jb 4216, har,Tew: ( = Kt ha,r.Tiw:, Qr ar,Tew:) Je 37, sf. ynIa;r.yI, Whaer.nI, ynIaur.Ti, ynIaer.YIw:; impv. haer., yair., War., hn”ya,r., inf. cs. Aar., tAar., hw<a]r;, ^t,(Aar., Ataor., abs. haor’, Aar’; pt. ha,ro, cs. haero, sf. yairo, ynIa'(ro, pl. ~yairo, cs. yaero, pass. tAyaur.: — 1. see (no obj.): subj. eye(s) Gn 271; subj. °ereƒ Ps 974; see :: y¹da± perceive Is 69; — 2. r¹°â l® see Ps 646; r¹°â la±ênayim look at outside appearances 1S 167; — 3. r¹°â & 2 acc. see that s.one is righteous (forsaken &c.) Gn 71 Ps 3725; — 4. r¹°â k® see s.thg/s.one as if it is … Ju 936; — 5. obj. of r¹°â is an indep. clause (w/o. conj.): r®°îtem ±¹´îtî you have seen me do Ju 948; — 6. foll. by kî & clause, see that Gn 3814; oft. obj. of r¹°â = subj. of kî-clause: saw the light, that it was good = saw that the light was g. (oth.: saw how good the light is) Gn 14 (« kî 6.); — 7. r¹°â še Ec 213 = r¹°â kî; — 8. l® & inf. as (preceding) obj. of r¹°â La 334-36; — 9. r¹°â in extended mngs.: perceive, become aware of Ho 910; = know (a person, French connaître) Dt 339; look at, consider Gn 115; take any trouble about Gn 3923, subj. God Ex 431, abs. Ps 1011; r¹°â h­ see whether Ex 418, r¹°â mâ see what 2C 196; — 10. r¹°â b®, see (w. emotion): gaze at SS 611; enjoy looking at 1S 619; gloat over Ps 2218; look w. sorrow at Gn 2116; subj. God, see (s.one’s affliction) w. concern Gn 2932 ; r¹°â bakk¹b¢d examine the liver (for divination) in suspense Ez 2126; — 11. see (visions) Is 3010, « rœ°eh, mar°eh; r¹°â baµ­lom Gn 4122; — 12. impv. r®°¢h see! (almost interj., > hinneh) Gn 2727; sg. even in addressing plural Dt 18; so other forms of r¹°â as means of arousing attention 1K 2013; da± ûr®°¢h 1K 207; — 13. r¹°â w. acc. look at (w. disdain, inquisitiveness) SS 16 ; — 14. see = visit 2K 829; — 15. see = choose, select Gn 228 2K 103; r®°uyâ chosen Est 29; — 16. perceive (not w. eyes) Gn 219, notice 1K 104 , subj. l¢b Ec 116; r¹°îtî °ûr I have seen ( = felt, experienced) the fire Is 4416; = get to know, become acquainted with: obj. famine Je 512, life Ec 99; — 17. w. spec, obj.: God Gn 3231, face of God 3310, face of king 2K 2519; — 18. prep.: °el Is 177; b® « 10.; r¹°â bên … l® see the difference between … & Ma 318; r¹°â min watch s.one (& so learn from him) Ju 717; r¹°â ±al look (reproachfully) at (s.one) Ex 521.

nif.: pf. ha’r.nI, ht’a]r.nI, War.nI; impf. ha,r’yE, ar’yE, ar’YEw:, ar’aew”, impv. haer’he; inf. haor’he, tAar’he, tAar’le, Is 112 (< Œhel.); pt. ha,r.nI, ha’r.nI: — 1. appear, become visible: dry land Gn 19, no stone (in building) 1K 618; make one’s appearance 1K 181f (w. °el); — 2. subj. God: appear (w. °el) Gn 127; — 3. nir°â °et-p®nê [yhwh] etc. 1S 122 & elsewh.: w. nif., appear before the presence of Y., but perh. orig. qal, ‘see the face of Y.,’ text then changed for theological reasons.

pual (qal pass.): pf. Waru; be seen Jb 3321. †

hif.: pf. ha’r.h,, t’yair.hi, ytiyaer.h;, sf. ynIa;r.hi, ynIa'(r.h,, ^a]r.h,, ~a’r.h,, Wna’r.h,, ^ytiyair.h,, ~ytiyair.hi, ynIt'(yair.hi, Ps 7120 Qr; impf. ha,r.y:, ar.Y:w:, (like qal!), sf. ynIaer.y:, Whaer.a;, &amp;’a,r.a;, ~War.Y:w:; impv. sf. ynIaer.h;, ynIyair.h;, inf. tAar.h;, ~t’Aar.h;, hk’t.Aar.h;, ~k,t.aor.l;, (< Œh;l.) pt. ha,r.m;: — 1. let, make s.one see, show Gn 121; subj. God, obj. prophets Je 241; — 2. make s.one experience Ps 7120; — 3. spec.: render s.one able to see Dt 133; w. kî, mâ, show s.one that/what 2K 810 Zc 19; w. acc. & b® let me look w. pleasure on (enemies &c.) Ps 5911; w. 3 acc. cause s.one to see s.one else as, show s.one s.one else as 2K 813.
hof.: pf. ha’r.h’, ht’aer.h’, ht’yaer.h’; pt. ha,r.m’: be shown, be made to see s.thg: subj. person, obj. thing Ex 2540 2630 Dt 435; be shown to s.one: subj. thing, °¢t + person Lv 1349. †

hitp.: impf. War’t.YIw:, War’t.Ti, ha,r’t.nI: — 1. look at each other Gn 421; — 2. face each other = try our/their strength w. each other (in battle) 2K 148•11 2C 2517•21. † (pg 329)
ha’r’: Dt 1413 (rd ha’D’ w. mss.?) kite, Milvus milvus. † (pg 329)

Hol1918  h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

Hol742  hB’rua]
hB’rua]: pl. tABrua], sf. ~h,yteBorua]: — 1. window in the wall through which smoke escapes, chimney Ho 133; in dovecotes Is 608; metaph. of eyesockets Ec 123; — 2. windows in « r¹qê­±, through which rain falls Gn 711 82. (pg 26)

Hol1918  h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)

Hol913  B.
B.: alw. proclitic, vowel varies: ~d’B., ~D’B;, tWmd.Bi, !Ara]B;, ~Ada/B,, yrix\b’ (b©), ~yhil{aBe; sf. yBi; ^B., hk’B. 4× & %B'(; f. %B’; AB & hBo Je 1724 †; HB’; pl. WnB’ñ; ~k,B’, !k,B’; ~h,B’, ~B’, 3× hM’heB’ñ; f. !heB’, !h,B’, 3× hN”heñB’: basic mng. local & instrumental, in, at: — 1. (remain) in: babbayit, b¹°¹reƒ; abstract: b®±ênê in the eyes of = in the judgment of, Gn 164; spatial mng. reinforced, b®qereb, b®tôk; — 2. (be) among (a group), baggôyîm La 13; — 3. before sg., expressing type or character (‘beth essentiae’), as: b®°¢l šadday, as El Sh. Ex 63; — 4. (area) within (which): biš±¹rék¹ within your gates Ex 2010; — 5. with a high object, on: b®µœr¢b on Horeb 1K 89; — 6. temporal: bayyôm on the (7th) day Gn 22, bašš¹nâ h¹hî° (in) that year Ju 108; — 7. characteristic, circumstantial: b®š¹lôm in peace 1S 297; Is 911 b®kol-zœ°t in all this > in spite of all this; — 8. according to: b®derek according to the way of Is 1024•26; — 9. after vbs. of motion, into: Gn 198; — 10. fm. idea of remaining come exprs. like yôm b®yôm day by day Ne 818; — 11. w. vbs. such as ‘grasp’, ‘persist’, ‘trust’; expr. of pleasure & aversion w. vbs. of perception: ‘look into’ > ‘look w. pleasure at,’ Ob (12); — 12. sharing: a) (together) with, (build) Zc 615; b®lœ°, b®°ên, biblî, b®°efes without; hostility, against: nilµam b® fight against Ex 110; — 13. oft., coupled w. ±ad, l®, or hê local, (away) from: b®´¢±îr °ad from S. to Dt 114; — 14. more than, b¹hem Ps 893; — 15. means, tool: a) b®šôr (plow) with an ox Dt 2210; b) God speaks through (by) a prophet 1K 2228; c) swear by God Gn 2123; — 16. price, value: b®kesef for silver Gn 239; — 17. material: b®m¹r°œl from mirrors Ex 388; — 18. cause: because of, for the sake of (five men) Gn 1828; — 19. in later material, a substitute for °et acc., p¢ra´ b®y¹dayim spread out hands La 117; — 20. w. inf. cs., when, b®hibb¹r®°¹m when they were created Gn 24; — 21. oft. missing before bayit, petaµ: š®bî bêt°¹bîk stay in your father’s house Gn 3811. (pg 32)

The other verse is in Gen 18:19. See Holladay entry 6607 definition 6 and 14. The context of Genesis chapter 18 and 19 needs to be thoroughly read. The Lord God is in heaven and on earth. To say otherwise you risk turning YHVH into a Greek God who appears in the flesh but ceases to fill the whole cosmos while in the flesh. This is something only YHVH is known to do. Note that the Lord God is in a meeting together with Abraham alone after the 2 angels depart from them. The Lord God is clearly not consulting the angels. The Lord God is in THE PLURAL and in consultation with Abraham! The Lord God is in heaven while The Lord God is on earth as a man without a human soul, The Eternal Word of the Lord being in its place. The Lord God said, “Shall I hide from Abraham what I am about to do (Gen 18:17).”  Again, the angels leave without saying a word! Abraham SO CLEARLY does not advise the Lord God as to whether He should reveal or not what He was getting ready to do. See immediately below the context of The Lord God’s speech.

17 Now the LORD had said, “Shall I hide from Abraham what I am about to do,
18 since Abraham is to become a great and populous nation and all the nations of the earth are to bless themselves by him?
19 For I have singled him out, that he may instruct his children and his posterity to keep the way of the LORD by doing what is just and right, in order that the LORD may bring about for Abraham what He has promised him.”
20 Then the LORD said, “The outrage of Sodom and Gomorrah is so great, and their sin so grave!
21 I will go down to see whether they have acted altogether according to the outcry that has reached Me; if not, I will take note.”
22 The men went on from there to Sodom, while Abraham remained standing before the LORD.
23 Abraham came forward and said, “Will You sweep away the innocent along with the guilty? (Gen 18:17-23 TNK)

Let us take a hard look now at Genesis chapter 18 verse 17 in order to determine who exactly was the Lord God was addressing when He asked a question that ends at verse 18.  See the following verse to cross reference the Tanakh above with the Hebrew Bible Transliterated. “wyhwh(wa|´dönäy) ´ämär ha|mükassè ´ánî më|´ab•rähäm ´ášer ´ánî `öSè (Gen 18:17 BHT)” The two Hebrew words that are in question are “amar” and “oseh.” Please see immediately below the links to cross reference the two prior Hebrew words:

An analysis reveals that:

  1. The Lord God was in heaven and on earth (otherwise you do great dishonor to Him, equating Him with Zeus ie). See the following verse: “If a man enters a hiding place, Do I not see him? — says the LORD. For I fill both heaven and earth — declares the LORD (Jer 23:24 TNK).”
  2. The Lord God asked a question.
  3. The angels departed from the Lord God and Abraham
  4. The angels provided not anwser on biblical record.
  5. Abraham asked a question to the Lord God after the Lord God asked the Lord God’s question.
  6. The Hebrew word “amar” is a “verb qal perfect 3rd person masculine singular homonym 1“. See immediately below Joüon, Paul, and T. Muraoka. A Grammar of Biblical Hebrew. 2nd ed. Sec 42 pp120 Inflection of the Qal Perfect

a The inflection of the Qal Perfect (and other Perfects) occurs through the addition of sufformatives, in the majority of which one easily recognises the separate personal pronouns. In the third person, the pronoun is understood; the feminine is marked by for *at (as in nouns): hl’j.q)”; the plural by u: Wlj.q)”. The form of the perfect seems to have been initially used with stative verbs, e.g. T’d>bñ;K’ = dbeK’ + hT’a;: heavy-you = you are heavy(1). Similarly, in order to express an action we find, with a form such as *qatal, H’l.jñ;q’ killer-you, whence the past meaning: “you are the one who is the killer,” you have killed.

b The perfect of active verbs is always of the type *qatal, which normally becomes lj+”q’ (pausal form) as in nouns, e.g. *dabar becomes rb’D” word (in pause and context). In context the form is lj;q’ with ¤; (2). This second vowel a of *qatal is dropped in open syllables: hl’j.q)”, Wlj.q)”, but reappears in pause: hl’j+”q)”, Wlj+”q)”. The first vowel a drops in open syllables two places away from the stress as in ~T,l.j;q., !T,l.j;q., the heavy sufformatives of which carry the stress (§ 30 e).

c The stative perfect of the type dbeK’ similarly loses its ¤e in hd”b.K(‘ and Wdb.K(‘. In closed syllables ¤e normally becomes ¤; (§ 29 d), e.g. T’d>bñ;K’, ~T,d>b;K.. (One also finds lJeqi, T’l.Jñ;qi; lyjiq.hi, T’l.jñ;q.hi).

The stative perfect of the rare type !joq’ equally loses its ¤o in hn:j.q)”, Wnj.q)”. In stressed closed syllables ¤o is maintained, e.g. T’n>joq’; it changes to ¤” in unstressed syllables ~T,n>j’q. you killed, Tñ’l.k’*y’w> and you will be able to, wyTil.k’y> I overpowered him.

d Instead of ¤; one sometimes finds ¤i (¤, in one instance) in unstressed closed syllables. Thus from the stative verb vr;y” to inherit (for vrey”*) one finds, e.g. ~T,v.rIywI Dt 4.1 etc., where the i is perhaps due to the influence of


1 The origin of the perfect is clearly recognisable in the stative form of Akkadian and Amarna Canaanite; on the latter, see Böhl 1909: 42-48. The priority of the future is indicated by the fact that the conjugation of the perfect often takes place on the analogy of the future: see § 52 a (Piel), § 53 a (Hitpael), § 54 a (Hifil), § 55 b (various internal passive conjugations), § 58 a (Qal passive), § 59 a (rare conjugations).

2 Compare the ¤; of the construct state of nouns, e.g. rb’D” (§ 95 d).

See below Westminster Leningrad Hebrew Old Testament (WTT) and Westminster Hebrew Morphology (WTM) with Holladay entries.

 17 וַֽיהֹוָ֖ה אָמָ֑ר הַֽמְכַסֶּ֤ה אֲנִי֙ מֵֽאַבְרָהָ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֖ר אֲנִ֥י עֹשֶֽׂה׃
(Gen 18:17 WTT)

w> particle conjunction   hwhy noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol3193  hwhy
hwhy: the name of God, first in Gn 24; Qr yn”doa], hence printed texts hw”hy>; for pronunciation (almost certainly yahweh), etymology, occurrence &c. see comm. & theologies; w. prep. hwhyB;, ŒK;, Œl;; hwhyw:. (pg 130)

Hol2098  w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

rma verb qal perfect 3rd person masculine singular homonym 1

Hol595  rm;a’
I rm;a’ (5280 ×): qal: pf. Œa, yTir.m;a’, yTir.m'(a’; impf. rm;ayO, rm'(ayO, rm;aTo, rme(aTo, rm;(aOYw:, rm,aOYw:, rm;ao, rm'(ao, rm;¿AÀaow”, hr’m.Aaw”Æw>, Wrm.aOy, Wrme(ayO, hn”r.m;aTo, ^r.m;aTo, Wrm.To 2S 1914, !rum.aTo, rm;aOn, rm,aONw:; impv. rmoa/¿w<), -rm’a/, yrim.ai; inf. rmoa/¿B,ÆK,), -rm’a/, rmoa] Ez 258, alw. rmoale ( 3× rAmale), yrim.a’, ~r’m.a’, ^r.m’a], abs. r¿AÀmoa’ pt. rme¿AÀao, tr,m,ñao, hr’m.ao, ~yrim.ao, yrem.ao, t¿AÀrom.ao, rWma’h, Mi 27 (txt ?): — 1. say, the simple rendering of speech (:: rB,Di speak Lv 12), of men Gn 223, God 13, animal 31; speech follows in dir. Gn 32 or indir. 1213 discourse; prophetic oracle oft. introduced by kœh °¹mar yhwh; °¹mar never appears w/o words of speech, so that Gn 48 &c. lack s.thg; say s.thg to s.one, w. °el Gn 316, l® 317; say s.thg about s.one °el (for ±al) 2K 1932; — 2. l¢°mœr, ‘in order to say’ usually means ‘as he/she said,’ ‘with these words,’ Gn 122; often no more than our quotation marks, pause before dir. discourse Ex 610, even after dabb¢r 2S 1912, & in cases like Am 85 1K 15; — 3. w. acc.: a) mention: a) s.one Gn 4327, ß) s.thg Gn 222, mention with praise, praise Ps 4011, g) name, call, w. l® Is 520, w. 2 acc. La 215; say s.thg of s.one (l®) Ps 416; promise 2K 819, w. l® w. inf. Ne 915; — 4. say to oneself = think, °¹mar b®libbô Gn 1717, °a. °el-libbô 821, l®libbô Ho 72, °¹mar alone, oft. for a false assumption Gn 4428; — 5. °¹mar w. l® & inf. intend Ex 214; — 6. order Est 117; contents of order in its fulfillment Ps 10531•34.

nif.: pf. rm;a/n<; impf. rmea’yE, rm;(a’yE, rm,a’ñyE Is 43: — 1. be said Nu 2114; — 2. = one says (current saying), Gn 109; — 3. be named, called (« qal 3) Gn 3229.

hif.: pf. T’r.m;a/h,, ^r.ymia/x,: cause to say, proclaim ( covenant formulation), Dt 2617f. † (pg 21)

h] particle interrogative   hsk verb piel participle masculine singular absolute

Hol3847  hsK
hsK: qal: pt. hs,Ko, pass. cs. yWsK.: cover: — 1. forgive (sin); k®sûy µa‰¹°â whose sin is forgiven Ps 321 — 2. keep s.thg hidden Pr 1216•23. †

nif.: pf. ht’s'(k.nI; inf. tAsK’hi: be covered Je 5142 Ez 248. †

piel: pf. hS’Ki, ht’S.Ki, tySiKi, yti¿yÀSeKi, ytiySiKi, WSKi, WnySiKi, WhS’Ki, AmS’ñKi Ex 1510, ynIt.S'(Ki, ^ytiySiKi, %WSKi; impf. hS,k;y>, sk;y>w:, hS,k;T., sk;T.w:, ySik;T., hS,k;a], WSk;y>w:, WhSek;y>w:, hN”S,k;y>, WNS,k;y>, AmySek;y> Ps 14010 Qr (Kt AmWS-), &amp;’S,k;y>, %Sek;y>, ^S.k;T., &amp;’S,(k;T., WnSek;T., ~ySik;T.w:, WhSuk;y>w:, WmyUs.k;y> Ex 154; impv. WnSuK;; inf. t¿AÀSoK;, AtSoK;; pt. hS,k;m., ~ySik;m., tAKk;m.: cover (trans): — 1. subj. the covering: a) w. acc.: subj. water Ex 155, cloud Ex 2415f, darkness Is 602, metaph. dishonor Je 325; b) w. ±al: subj. water Hb 214 &c.; — 2. covering in pred.: a) 2 acc. Mal 213, = clothe with Ez 1610; b) acc. & b® with 1K 11; c) acc. of covering & ±al Ez 247; — 3. covering named in earlier clause: w. acc. 1K 718; — 4. covering unexpressed: a) w. acc. Gn 933; b) w. ±al Dt 139 ; — 5. cover up, conceal: a) acc. blood Gn 3726; b) conceal one’s sin Ps 325, other wrong Pr 1011; keep s.thg secret fm. (min) Gn 1817; — 6. intrans. clothe onesf. w., put on, w. acc. clothes Ez 1618, sackcloth Jon 36.

pual: pf. WSK’; impf. hS,kuy>, WSkuy>w:; pt. ~ySikum., tASkum.: be covered: mountains (w. water) Gn 719f; covering in acc. Ps 8011; w. b® Ec 64.

hitp.: impf. sK;t.YIw:, sK'(t.Tiw:, WSK;t.yI; pt. hS,K;t.mi, ~ySiK;t.mi: cover onesf.: w/o obj. Gn 2465; obj. in acc. Jon 38, w. b® 1K 1129. (pg 161)

Hol1919  h]
h], h;, h,: interr. word, wh. may, however, be omitted; alw. proclitic (exc. Dt 326), before first word of qn.; forms: %lenEh], T’x.c;r’h] :: %leaeh;, ~T,[.d;y>h;, hS,k;m.h;, la,h; :: !b,L.h;, ~t,yaiR.h; :: tmeh’h,, yTil.d;h\h,, ykinOa’h,: — 1. simple qn.: a) w. answer ‘no’: h­šœmer °¹µî °¹nœkî am I … ? Gn 49, repeated h­ … h­lœ° Ps 949f; b) w. answer ‘yes’: hamƒ¹°tanî 1K 2120; c) rhetorical h­kî °¹µî °attâ you are of course … Gn 2915; — 2. double qn.: a) ha±ôlâ … h­yœredet is he the one who (cj) Ec 321; b) h­ … °im Je 214; h­ … °ô Ec 219; — 3. dependent qn., = whether: w. r¹°â Gn 88. (pg 76)

ynIa] pronoun independent 1st person common singular

Hol628  ynIa]
ynIa], ynIa'(: I (« °¹nœkî): w. pt. ±œ´eh °­nî I do Ju 153; esp. for emph. °emšœl °­nî it is I who rule Ju 823; later oft. w/o this emph. Ec 211 &c.; °¹TÄnî as answer to qn.: I am, yes Gn 2724; ha°­nî Is 669; formula of introduction °­nî par±œh Gn 4144. (pg 22)

!mi particle preposition   ~h’r’b.a; noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol78  ~h’r’b.a;
~h’r’b.a;: n. pers. Abraham, « ~r’b.a;. (pg 3)

Hol4726  !mi
!mi: extended form yNImi 30 ×, -yNEmi Is 3011; usu. keeps form -!mi before art., rarely otherw.; usu. assimilated, !Bemi, before gutturals & r usu. me, ~d’a’me &c., but tAyh.mi, #Wxmi; before cons. w. shewa vl{v.miK. Gn 3824; before y>: ydeymi, but ynEveY>mi Dn 122; sf. yNIM,ñmi, &amp;’M,ñmi, WNM,mi, hN”M,mi, but ^M.mi, %Memi, also yNImi (4 ×) & yNIm,ñ (6 ×), Whn>m,( Jb 412, aWh-!mi Is 182•7; ~K,mi, ~h,me, hM’heme (2 ×), ~h,n>mi (1 ×), !heme Ez 1647•52: basic meaning out of, away from: — 1. spatial, a) indicates beginning-point of motion, out of, w. y¹ƒ¹° &c. Ex 1242, w. ‘save’ 1S 1735; min-haµœr from (the door-hole) = through SS 54; min-hû° w®h¹l®°â near & far Is 182•7; b) direction of movement, w. °el: mizzan °el-zan Ps 14413 , w. (w®) ±ad Ex 223 Lv 1312, cf. mimm®k¹ w¹hinnâ away fm. you in this direction 1S 2021, mi´´®mœ°l (to) northward Jos 1927, m¢r¹µôq (flee [to]) far away Is 223; c) indicates the place in whose direction ( = where) s.thg is: miqqedem eastward, in the east Gn 28, mibbayit inside Lv 1441; — 2. temporal: a) since, from (the time of): minn®±urîm 1S 122; the beginning-point is included: mi´´®nat hayyœb¢l from the year of jubilee (on) Lv 2717; b) just after: m¢µ¹qîƒ just after awakening Ps 7320, mimmoµ¯r¹t on the very next day Gn 1934; c) after: miqq¢ƒ y¹mîm a few days later Gn 43, miyy¹mîm some time later Ju 114; d) from the time when s.thg happens: mîmê qedem in primeval times Is 3726; w. inf., mibbô° at homecoming Is 231 ; — 3. designates a) the material out of wh. s.thg is made: min-h¹°­d¹mâ Gn 219, niskêhem midd¹m their bloody drink-offerings Ps 164; b) the place of origin: miƒƒor±â from Z. Ju 132; — 4. designates a) cause: m¢rê­µ mayim because of (= at) the scent of water Jb 149, m¢rœb because of (= by) the multitude of Ez 2818; b) originator: m¢hammelek (resulted) from the king = by the king’s will 2S 337, mimmennî ûm¢hem (which word,) mine or theirs Je 4428; c) subj. of active verb becomes obj. of min- w. passive vb.: mimmê hammabbûl (all life shall be cut off) by the waters of a flood Gn 911; — 5. designates position or standard of an assessor: a) q¹‰œntî min I am small, unimportant for (= I am too small for, I am unworthy of) (all the mercies) Gn 3211; rab mimm®k¹ hadderek, journey is too far for you 1K 194; b) in expressions of comparison, more than: µ¹k¹m min, wiser than 1K 511; w. vb., gadd¢l min, make s.thg greater than 1K 147; — 6. designates the logical cause: in consequence of, because of (cf. 4a): miqqœl haqqœr¢° Is 64 , mippî yhwh by Y.’s command 2C 3612; thus mibb®lî mibbiltî, because it is not, fm. lack of; — 7. w. vbs. of fearing, hiding, protecting, warning, from, against: a) y¹r¢° min Ex 3430, str (nif.) min Gn 414 &c.; b) thus, far from > without: mippaµad without fear Jb 219; — 8. part.; a) part of a whole: mikkol-yi´r¹°¢l (men) fm. all Isr. Ex 1825, m¢harb¢h (a few) of many Je 422; b) after adj., superlative: ha‰‰ôb w®hayy¹š¹r mibb®nê the best & fittest of 2K 103; c) the part is omitted: min-´¹r¹yw = one of his princes Dn 115; w. neg., m¢±abdê (not) anyone of the servants = none of 2K 1023; d) indef. part of the whole: midd¹m some of the blood Lv 59; w. °eµ¹d, °aµat, any of the things Lv 42; — 9. min w. inf.: a) m¢°ah­bat from his loving = because he loves Dt 78; b) m¢r®°ôt (eyes) dim from seeing = too dim to see, dim so that he could not see Gn 271; c) temporal: min-šilµô °œt¹m after he sent them away 1C 88; — 10. w. oth. preps.: a) min before oth. prep.: m¢°aµar, mibbên &c., « respective preps.; b) min after oth. prep.: l®min: l®m¢r¹µôq (I will fetch my knowledge) from afar Jb 363; temporal: from long ago Is 3726; l®mibbêt l® on the inner side of Nu 187, l®mittaµat l® underneath 1K 732; l®miyyôm since the days when 2S 711; — 11. Dt 3311 min-y®qûmûn conj. that … not (if true reading). (pg 201)

rv,a] particle relative

Hol874  rv,a]
rv,a]: I. as relative particle: — 1. sporadically in old or poetic texts, originally the relative clause was joined to the noun w/o °­šer, Is 4020; — 2. °­šer can be added to connect the noun to the clause, Ho 21; — 3. °­šer adds to the explicitness of the expression, the relation being more precisely expressed by deferred prep. & sf. or acc. sign, Gn 212, Dt 122; — 4. later, prep. & sf. or other explanatory word occurs directly after °­šer, Is 528; — 5. later still, any explanatory word is omitted altogether, Gn 28, h¹°¹d¹m °­šer y¹ƒar, the man whom he formed (:: 1.); — 6. prep, may be prefixed to °­šer: ba°­šer Gn 2117, m¢°­šer Ex 511, °et-°­šer whom Ex 3312; — 7. nouns in cs. before °­šer: m®qôm °­šer Gn 3920.

II. as conj.: r¹±¹t¹m °­šer ±­z¹bûnî Je 116 their wickedness (in) which they left me = wickedness that they…: thus °­šer comes to = older kî: a) in object clause, that: š¹ma±nû °¢t °­šer, we have heard that (or, how) Jos 210; b) introducing dir. discourse 1S 1520; c) giving cause, because (< in that) Gn 3018; d) giving consequence, so that Gn 117; e) comparison, as Ex 106 ; f) final, so that Ru 31; g) conditional, if Lv 422. (pg 30)

ynIa] pronoun independent 1st person common singular

Hol628  ynIa]
ynIa], ynIa'(: I (« °¹nœkî): w. pt. ±œ´eh °­nî I do Ju 153; esp. for emph. °emšœl °­nî it is I who rule Ju 823; later oft. w/o this emph. Ec 211 &c.; °¹TÄnî as answer to qn.: I am, yes Gn 2724; ha°­nî Is 669; formula of introduction °­nî par±œh Gn 4144. (pg 22)

hf[ verb qal participle masculine singular absolute homonym 1   

Hol6607  hf'[‘
hf'[‘ (2600 × ): qal: pf. Œ[, ht’f.[‘(, tf'[‘ Lv 2521, t’yfi[‘, tyfi[‘, Wf[‘, !t,yfi[], Wnyfi[‘, sf. Whf’ñ[‘, ^f.[‘(, ynIt.f'([‘, Whytiyfi[], ynItiyfi[]; impf. hf,[]y:, f[;y:, f[;Y:w:, hf,[]T;, hfe[]T;, Jos 79 & 2S 1312 & fe[]T; Je 4016 Qr, f[;T;, yfi[]T;, hf,[/a,, Wf[]y:, hn”yf,[]T;, hf,[]n:, hfe[]N:w: ! Jos 924, sf. Whfe[]y:, ~fe[]y:, ^f.[,a,, hN”f,[/a,; impv. hfe[], yfi[], Wf[], inf. tAf[], hf[], Af[], sf. Whf[], Ht’f[], abs. hf[‘, pt. hf,¿AÀ[o, cs. hfe¿AÀ[o, f. hf'[o, pl. ~yfi[o, cs. yfe[o, f. tAf[o, sf. Whfe[o, wyf'[o, yf'([o, pass, yWf[‘, > Wf[‘, Jb 4125, f. hy”Wf[], hy”fu[], pl. ~yIWf[], f. tAWf[], Kt tyOWf[], Qr 1S 2518: — 1. make, manufacture Gn 321, lay out (garden) Am 914; — 2. make, apply Ex 3924 (w. ±al), Ez 4119 (w. °el); — 3. make s.thg (acc.) into s.thg (l®) Is 4417; w. 2 acc. 2K 316; make s.thg out of s.thg. (material) (2 acc.) Ex 3724; make s.thg with s.thg (b®) 1C 188; — 4. God as sub., = create Gn 17; pt. pass. created Jb 4125, pt. act. maker = creator Jb 417; — 5. derived mng.: effect, produce, do: a wonder Ex 1110, cogn. acc. deed Gn 209; of cow, produce (milk) Is 722, of man, put on (fat) Jb 1527, of plants, bear (fruit) Gn 111; acquire, win (glory) Gn 311, (nefeš = slaves) Gn 125; ±œ´ê ´eker hired laborers Is 1910; — 6. prepare (food) Gn 187f, ±¹´ûy dressed (sheep) 1S 2518; take care of (feet, beard) 2S 1925; prepare s.thg for sacrifice 1K 1823; officiate 2K 1732; — 7. make (appoint) s.one (l®, to be …) Gn 122; — 8. var.: ±¹´â š¹lôm l® make peace w. Is 275; ±¹´â milµ¹mâ wage war Gn 142; ±¹´â y¹mîm spend days Ec 612; — 9. perform, carry out (orders) Ps 1118, (d®b¹rîm) Is 4216, (plan) Is 301; keep (Passover) Ex 1248; — 10. w. m®l¹°kâ do work 1K 1128, ±œ´ê m®l¹°kâ workmen 2K 1212; — 11. abs. act, step in Gn 4134 1S 146; — 12. w. °­šer cause s.thg to be done Ez 3627, w. še- Ec 314; — 13. work Gn 3030; ±¹´â b®tôk work s.thg into Ex 393; be busy 1K 2040; ±¹´â ‰ôb enjoy onesf. † Ec 312; — 14. w. ƒ®d¹qâ exercise justice Gn 1819, w. n®b¹lâ commit an outrage Gn 347, w. µesed show kindness Gn 2412; — 15. do: what have you done to (l®) us? Gn 209; oath-formula: kœh ya±­´eh-l®k¹ °®lœhim … 1S 317; 16. reflects mng. of previous vb., do, manage Je 125.

nif. (95 ×): pf. hf'[]n:, ht’f.[,n<, ht’f'([/n<, Wf[]n:; impf. hf,[‘yE, hf,[‘yTi Ex 2531 rd. hf,[‘Te, f[‘Te, Wf[‘yE, hn”yf,[‘Te; inf. tAf[‘he, sf. WtAf[‘he; pt. hf,[]n:, f. hf'[]n:, pl. ~yfi[]n:: — 1. be done: ma±­´îm Gn 209; be followed, carried out: advice 2S 1723; impers. y¢±¹´eh l® it shall be done to 1S 117; — 2. be made, manufactured, prepared: food Ex 1216, ark (of covt.) Je 316 , sacrifice Ez 4318; be kept: Passover 2K 2322f; be made = created: heavens Ps 336; y¢±¹´eh l® is used for Ez 155.

piel: pf. WF[i, cj. inf. tAF[;: press, squeeze Ez 233•8 cj. 21. †

pual (pass. qal): pf. ytiyFe[u: I was made = created Ps 13915. † (pg 285)

See below Westminster Leningrad Hebrew Old Testament (WTT) and Westminster Hebrew Morphology (WTM) with Holladay entries. See the following to cross reference with the Tanakh: ” the LORD rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah sulfurous fire from the LORD out of heaven.” (Gen 19:24 TNK) See also the following to cross reference with the Hebrew Bible Transliterated:  “wyhwh(wa|´dönäy) him•†îr `al-südöm wü`al-`ámörâ Gop•rît wä´ëš më´ët yhwh(´ädönäy) min-haššämäºyim (Gen 19:24 BHT)”

 24 וַֽיהוָ֗ה הִמְטִ֧יר עַל־סְדֹ֛ם וְעַל־עֲמֹרָ֖ה גָּפְרִ֣ית וָאֵ֑שׁ מֵאֵ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה מִן־הַשָּׁמָֽיִם׃ (Gen 19:24 WTT)

w> particle conjunction hwhy noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol3193 hwhy
hwhy: the name of God, first in Gn 24; Qr yn”doa], hence printed texts hw”hy>; for pronunciation (almost certainly yahweh), etymology, occurrence &c. see comm. & theologies; w. prep. hwhyB;, ŒK;, Œl;; hwhyw:. (pg 130)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

rjm verb hiphil perfect 3rd person masculine singular

Hol4535 rjm
rjm: nif.: impf. rjeM’Ti: be rained on Am 47. †

hif.: pf. ryjim.hi, yTir.j;m.hi; impf. rjem.y:, ryjim.a;; inf. ryjim.h;; pt. ryjim.m;: — 1. him‰îr m¹‰¹r ±al, have/make rain fall on Is 56; — 2. him‰îr (±al) let it rain, have it rain Gn 25; obj. brimstone Gn 1924 &c.

cj. hof. pt. hr’j’m.mu (oth.: pual hr’J’mum.) for hr’h’jom. Ez 2224: rained on. † (pg 192)

l[; particle preposition homonym 2 ~dos. noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol5792 ~dos.
~dos.: loc. hm’doñs.: n. loc. Sodom. (pg 253)
Hol6292 l[;
I l[;: l[‘(: height: š¹mayim m¢±¹l heaven above Gn 2739, huqam ±¹l be raised on high 2S 231; > amount Is 5918.
(pg 273)
II l[;: sf. yl;[‘, yl'([‘, ^yl,[‘, ykiy>l'([‘, wyl'[‘, h’yl,[‘h, 1S 924, Wnyle[‘, ~h,yle[] & ~h,le[], Amyle[‘; yle[]: — 1. higher than > on, over: š¹kab ±al 2S 47; > in front of (if one person is standing & the other sitting): dibber ±al Je 610, ±¹mad ±al Gn 188; garment on s.one Gn 3723; metaph. load (bride-price) on s.one Gn 3412: duty: it is for me to (w. l® & inf.) 2S 1811; ±al w. ƒiwwâ, p¹qad: order s.one to; w. sensual & emotion impressions: m¹tôq ±al sweet to (your taste) Pr 2413; on = (supported) by; µ¹yâ ±al live by Gn 2740; — 2. upon = because of: ±al-zœ°t, ±al-k¢n therefore; ±al-r¹±¹t¹m because of … Je 116; — 3. with regard to, concerning: w. regard to redemption Ru 47; — 4. according to, ±al-dibr¹tî according to the manner Ps 1104; ±al-pî = according to; — 5. over against: ±al-p¹nay over against me = in defiance of me Ex 203; > in spite of: ±al-da±t®k¹ in spite of your knowing Jb 107; — 6. (w. expr. of motion) onto: ±al-hammizb¢­µ Lv 17; ±¹lâ ±al-l¢b comes to mind Je 316; — 7. upon = in addition to: w. y¹saf Dt 199; šeqer ±al šeqer lie upon lie Je 420; l¹qaµ ±al take (as a wife) in addition to Gn 289; therefore ±al is used w. verbs of preferring, surpassing; g¹bar ±al surpass Gn 4926; — 8. above = against, face to face w.: niqrâ ±¹lênû meet with us Ex 318; implies weight, predominance, but shades into °el; — 9. k®±al: k®±al-kœl according to all Is 637; — 10. m¢±al from (upon), down from Gn 2464, off (from) Jb 199; l¢k m¢±¹lay get away from me! Ex 1028; m¢±al l® up over Jon 46; ±ad m¢±al to above Ez 4120; — 11. conj.: ±al-b®lî in that … not Gn 3120; ±al lœ° because … not Ps 119136, although … not Is 539; ±al-°­šer because Ex 3235; ±al kî because Dt 3117. (pg 273)

w> particle conjunction l[; particle preposition homonym 2 hr’mo[] noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol6388 hr’mo[]
hr’mo[]: n. loc. Gomorrah. (pg 277)
Hol6292 l[;
I l[;: l[‘(: height: š¹mayim m¢±¹l heaven above Gn 2739, huqam ±¹l be raised on high 2S 231; > amount Is 5918.
(pg 273)
II l[;: sf. yl;[‘, yl'([‘, ^yl,[‘, ykiy>l'([‘, wyl'[‘, h’yl,[‘h, 1S 924, Wnyle[‘, ~h,yle[] & ~h,le[], Amyle[‘; yle[]: — 1. higher than > on, over: š¹kab ±al 2S 47; > in front of (if one person is standing & the other sitting): dibber ±al Je 610, ±¹mad ±al Gn 188; garment on s.one Gn 3723; metaph. load (bride-price) on s.one Gn 3412: duty: it is for me to (w. l® & inf.) 2S 1811; ±al w. ƒiwwâ, p¹qad: order s.one to; w. sensual & emotion impressions: m¹tôq ±al sweet to (your taste) Pr 2413; on = (supported) by; µ¹yâ ±al live by Gn 2740; — 2. upon = because of: ±al-zœ°t, ±al-k¢n therefore; ±al-r¹±¹t¹m because of … Je 116; — 3. with regard to, concerning: w. regard to redemption Ru 47; — 4. according to, ±al-dibr¹tî according to the manner Ps 1104; ±al-pî = according to; — 5. over against: ±al-p¹nay over against me = in defiance of me Ex 203; > in spite of: ±al-da±t®k¹ in spite of your knowing Jb 107; — 6. (w. expr. of motion) onto: ±al-hammizb¢­µ Lv 17; ±¹lâ ±al-l¢b comes to mind Je 316; — 7. upon = in addition to: w. y¹saf Dt 199; šeqer ±al šeqer lie upon lie Je 420; l¹qaµ ±al take (as a wife) in addition to Gn 289; therefore ±al is used w. verbs of preferring, surpassing; g¹bar ±al surpass Gn 4926; — 8. above = against, face to face w.: niqrâ ±¹lênû meet with us Ex 318; implies weight, predominance, but shades into °el; — 9. k®±al: k®±al-kœl according to all Is 637; — 10. m¢±al from (upon), down from Gn 2464, off (from) Jb 199; l¢k m¢±¹lay get away from me! Ex 1028; m¢±al l® up over Jon 46; ±ad m¢±al to above Ez 4120; — 11. conj.: ±al-b®lî in that … not Gn 3120; ±al lœ° because … not Ps 119136, although … not Is 539; ±al-°­šer because Ex 3235; ±al kî because Dt 3117. (pg 273)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

tyrIp.G” noun common feminine singular absolute

Hol1636 tyrIp.G”
tyrip.G”: sulphur Gn 1924. (pg 63)

w> particle conjunction vae noun common both singular absolute homonym 1

Hol822 vae
I vae (380 ×), mostly f.: sf. wVai, ~k,v.a,: fire, in variety of idioms, e.g.: w. y¹ƒâ°, breaks out Ex 225; n¹tan b®, light, put fire in Lv 101; oft. ´¹raf b¹°¢š Ex 2914; « accompanying word. (pg 29)
II vae: little, trifle, b®dê-°¢š Je 5158 Hb 213. † (pg 29)
Hol2098 w>
w>: form: mostly w>, but a) W before b, m, & p, & before cons. w. simple shewa; b) w” immediately before tone-syl.: ht’y>b'(ñw”; c) w:, w<, w” (w©) before cons. w. corresponding µatef: ynIa]w:; d) wI before y>: yhiywI; e) w: w. dageš forte & w” before a in impf. consec.; — 1. and, connecting 2 words or phrases: °ereƒ w®š¹mayim; oft. in hendiadys: š¹lôm w¹šeqet complete peace 1C 229; — 2. connecting 3 or more words, standing either a) before every word but the first: yayin w®qayiƒ w®šemen Je 4010, or b) only before the last: bammiqneh bakkesef ûbazz¹h¹b Gn 132; the 3rd–5th words have w® 2K 235; — 3. intensifying: also, even: ûb®môt¹m and in … too 2S 123; — 4. inclusive: with, and in addition: ûmaƒƒôt Ex 128; — 5. explanatory: and indeed: ûb®°app®kem Am 410; namely w®deber 1C 2112; — 6. w® > or in conditional & interr. clauses: ûb®°ištô or his wife Gn 2611; — 7. in repetition of a word, w® expresses variety: °eben w¹°eben various weights Pr 2010; — 8. after k® ‘as,’ w® = so: ûš®mû±â ‰ôbâ so is good news Pr 2525; — 9. w® … w® both … and Nu 914; — 10. connecting 2 or more clauses: w®hû° g¹r Ju 1916 ; — 11. a circumstantial clause introduced by w® becomes like a relative clause: w®h¢m and they = who Gn 1413, ûš®m¹h and her name = whose name Gn 161; — 12. in older Heb. a 2nd clause introduced by w® adds accompanying circumstances, supplementary comments, &c.: w®n¹±¹l and in doing so closed … Ju 323; — 13. connecting impvs. & jussives: Ju 196; — 14. connecting comparisons & parallelisms: Jb 57; — 15. w. antitheses, w® = but: w®°et-b®rîtî but my covenant Gn 1721; — 16. a series of clauses w. w® may express alternatives: whether … or Ex 2116; — 17. introducing clauses of conditions or circumstances: w®hî° yœšebet while she sat Ju 139; — 18. taking up the subj. of a main clause preceded by a clause of circumstance: w®hî° š¹l®µâ then she sent Gn 3825; — 19. similarly w® can be translated by a great variety of conjunctions: w®°¹nœkî since I Gn 152, w®š¹w° because Ps 6013 &c.; — 20. introducing an asseveration: w®°attem ±¢day Is 4312; — 21. after a command, question, or denial, w® before a juss. or coh. expresses subordination: w®°¢d®±â so that I may know Gn 4234; — 22. likewise, following an impv. or juss., w. w® + impv.: wehy¢h so that you are Gn 122; — 23. introducing an apodosis after a conditional clause: w®y¹l®dû then … Gn 318; — 24. similarly when the conditional clause is a ‘casus pendens’: w®nikr®tâ Gn 1714; — 25. introducing the verb after word of time: bayyôm hašš®lîšî wayyi´´¹° Gn 224; — 26. introducing deductions & qns. (oral style): w®h¹šîbû so repent! Ez 1832; w®°ayyô and where is he? Ex 220; — 27. as impf. consec., vocalized wa in expressing the progression of the action: wayyifga± … wayy¹len … wayyaµ­lœm Gn 2811, oft. = (and) then, also after word of time (« 25). Even at beginning of books (Ez Ru Est); as expr. of deduction: watt®sît¢nî so that you … Jb 23; — 28. in the ‘pf. consec.’ w® + pf. after impf. or impv., juss.: °­µapp¢´ ûl®qaµtîm Am 93; l¢k w®°¹mart¹TÄ 2S 75; — 29. other usages before pf.: a) iterative °¢d ya±­leh w®hišqâ Gn 26; b) Aram. for impf. consec. Ec 914-16; c) archival 2K 183ff 234-15; — 30. w® includes the negation of lœ° (Ps 1216) and °al (382). (pg 85)

!mi particle preposition tae particle preposition homonym 2

Hol892 tae
I tae: acc.-particle in prosaic & later material: -ta,, -tae( Jb 4126; sf. yti¿AÀao, ^t.ao, hb’t'(ao Ex 2935, %t’¿AÀao, Wnt’ñ¿AÀao, ~k,t.a,, ~k,t.Aa Jos 2315, ~h,Æw)t,t.a,, ~t’¿AÀao, !t’ao, hn”t’ñ¿AÀao, ~h,t.¿AÀao, Ez 2345 & !h,t.Aa 2347: — 1. bearing pers. sf., esp. if stressed, °œtî 1S 87; — 2. indicating acc. of noun when definite, either by def. art. Gn 11, w. proper name 2S 311, by def. gen. Gn 125, or w. noun w. sf. Ru 215; rarely w. indef. acc., but: °et-°îš Ex 2128; omission does not affect mng.; — 3. before non-pers. pron.: °et-mî, whom Is 68, cf. °¢t °­šer Nu 226; — 4. remarks: a) °et- can mark any sort of acc., esp. that of limitation: diseased °et-ragl¹yw as to his feet 1K 1523; b) after a pass. vb. it is construed impersonally: one told Esau’s words (acc.!) to Rebekah Gn 2742; c) at times °et- seems to stand before a stressed nominative, felt psychologically as acc., Ne 919; d) oft. °œtô &c. stands for °ittô, « II °¢t: Gn 342•9. (pg 31)
II tae: prep. with: -ta,; sf. yTiai, %T’ai (%Teai Is 5410), WnT’ai, ~k,T.ai, ~T’ai, sf.-forms oft. mistakenly for I tae: — 1. (together) with: w. h¹lak 2S 1617b; — 2. with (help of), 1C 218; °et-mî with whose help? Jb 264; — 3. by, at the side of: in their presence Is 308; beside me, besides me Ex 2023; °ittô µ­lôm he had a dream Je 2328; — 4. w. min: m¢°¢et, m¢°ittô &c., away from w. vbs. of removing, Gn 1727 acquisition (away) from a foreigner. (pg 31)
III tae: 1.: sf. Atae; pl. ~yTiai, 1S 1321 ~ytiae, sf. ~k,yTeai: iron farm-tool, plowshare or mattock 1S 1320f; — 2. °et-habbarzel 2K 65,? axe-blade, ? del., ? better I °¢t 4c. (pg 31)
Hol4726 !mi
!mi: extended form yNImi 30 ×, -yNEmi Is 3011; usu. keeps form -!mi before art., rarely otherw.; usu. assimilated, !Bemi, before gutturals & r usu. me, ~d’a’me &c., but tAyh.mi, #Wxmi; before cons. w. shewa vl{v.miK. Gn 3824; before y>: ydeymi, but ynEveY>mi Dn 122; sf. yNIM,ñmi, &amp;’M,ñmi, WNM,mi, hN”M,mi, but ^M.mi, %Memi, also yNImi (4 ×) & yNIm,ñ (6 ×), Whn>m,( Jb 412, aWh-!mi Is 182•7; ~K,mi, ~h,me, hM’heme (2 ×), ~h,n>mi (1 ×), !heme Ez 1647•52: basic meaning out of, away from: — 1. spatial, a) indicates beginning-point of motion, out of, w. y¹ƒ¹° &c. Ex 1242, w. ‘save’ 1S 1735; min-haµœr from (the door-hole) = through SS 54; min-hû° w®h¹l®°â near & far Is 182•7; b) direction of movement, w. °el: mizzan °el-zan Ps 14413 , w. (w®) ±ad Ex 223 Lv 1312, cf. mimm®k¹ w¹hinnâ away fm. you in this direction 1S 2021, mi´´®mœ°l (to) northward Jos 1927, m¢r¹µôq (flee [to]) far away Is 223; c) indicates the place in whose direction ( = where) s.thg is: miqqedem eastward, in the east Gn 28, mibbayit inside Lv 1441; — 2. temporal: a) since, from (the time of): minn®±urîm 1S 122; the beginning-point is included: mi´´®nat hayyœb¢l from the year of jubilee (on) Lv 2717; b) just after: m¢µ¹qîƒ just after awakening Ps 7320, mimmoµ¯r¹t on the very next day Gn 1934; c) after: miqq¢ƒ y¹mîm a few days later Gn 43, miyy¹mîm some time later Ju 114; d) from the time when s.thg happens: mîmê qedem in primeval times Is 3726; w. inf., mibbô° at homecoming Is 231 ; — 3. designates a) the material out of wh. s.thg is made: min-h¹°­d¹mâ Gn 219, niskêhem midd¹m their bloody drink-offerings Ps 164; b) the place of origin: miƒƒor±â from Z. Ju 132; — 4. designates a) cause: m¢rê­µ mayim because of (= at) the scent of water Jb 149, m¢rœb because of (= by) the multitude of Ez 2818; b) originator: m¢hammelek (resulted) from the king = by the king’s will 2S 337, mimmennî ûm¢hem (which word,) mine or theirs Je 4428; c) subj. of active verb becomes obj. of min- w. passive vb.: mimmê hammabbûl (all life shall be cut off) by the waters of a flood Gn 911; — 5. designates position or standard of an assessor: a) q¹‰œntî min I am small, unimportant for (= I am too small for, I am unworthy of) (all the mercies) Gn 3211; rab mimm®k¹ hadderek, journey is too far for you 1K 194; b) in expressions of comparison, more than: µ¹k¹m min, wiser than 1K 511; w. vb., gadd¢l min, make s.thg greater than 1K 147; — 6. designates the logical cause: in consequence of, because of (cf. 4a): miqqœl haqqœr¢° Is 64 , mippî yhwh by Y.’s command 2C 3612; thus mibb®lî mibbiltî, because it is not, fm. lack of; — 7. w. vbs. of fearing, hiding, protecting, warning, from, against: a) y¹r¢° min Ex 3430, str (nif.) min Gn 414 &c.; b) thus, far from > without: mippaµad without fear Jb 219; — 8. part.; a) part of a whole: mikkol-yi´r¹°¢l (men) fm. all Isr. Ex 1825, m¢harb¢h (a few) of many Je 422; b) after adj., superlative: ha‰‰ôb w®hayy¹š¹r mibb®nê the best & fittest of 2K 103; c) the part is omitted: min-´¹r¹yw = one of his princes Dn 115; w. neg., m¢±abdê (not) anyone of the servants = none of 2K 1023; d) indef. part of the whole: midd¹m some of the blood Lv 59; w. °eµ¹d, °aµat, any of the things Lv 42; — 9. min w. inf.: a) m¢°ah­bat from his loving = because he loves Dt 78; b) m¢r®°ôt (eyes) dim from seeing = too dim to see, dim so that he could not see Gn 271; c) temporal: min-šilµô °œt¹m after he sent them away 1C 88; — 10. w. oth. preps.: a) min before oth. prep.: m¢°aµar, mibbên &c., « respective preps.; b) min after oth. prep.: l®min: l®m¢r¹µôq (I will fetch my knowledge) from afar Jb 363; temporal: from long ago Is 3726; l®mibbêt l® on the inner side of Nu 187, l®mittaµat l® underneath 1K 732; l®miyyôm since the days when 2S 711; — 11. Dt 3311 min-y®qûmûn conj. that … not (if true reading). (pg 201)

hwhy noun proper no gender no number no state

Hol3193 hwhy
hwhy: the name of God, first in Gn 24; Qr yn”doa], hence printed texts hw”hy>; for pronunciation (almost certainly yahweh), etymology, occurrence &c. see comm. & theologies; w. prep. hwhyB;, ŒK;, Œl;; hwhyw:. (pg 130)

!mi particle preposition h; particle article ~yIm;v’ noun common masculine plural absolute

Hol8717 ~yIm;v’
~yIm;v’ (420 ×): ~yIm'(v’, cs. ymev., sf. ^ym,v’, wym’v’, ~k,ymev.; loc. hm’y>m;ñV’h;, (oft. w. pl. adj. or vb.): heaven(s), sky: — 1. = firmament Gn 18 ; windows of heaven 711; rain fm. heaven 82, fire fm. heaven 1924; stars in heaven 2217; — 2. = upper atmosphere (below the ‘firmament’), air, sky: birds of, Gn 126; — 3. associated w. God as his dwelling 1K 823, but heavens cannot contain God 827. (pg 375)
Hol1918 h;
h;: w. dageš forte &c. « gramm., def. art., the: I: — 1. in older & poet. Heb., oft. omitted, š¹mayim & °ereƒ Is 12; art. then had demonstr. mng.: hayyôm, the day there, today Gn 414, happa±am this time; — 2. rarely,, before fin. vb., introducing rel. clause heh¹l®kû who went Jos 1024; — 3. before pt., as appos.: hannœt¢n who gives Gn 4921.

II. def. art.: — 1. individually, w. known noun: h¹±îr the (already mentioned) city Gn 115; — 2. w. voc.: hammelek (O) king! 1S 249; — 3. w. proper nouns, spec. hayyard¢n, hakkarmel, hall®b¹nôn, ha´´¹‰¹n; — 4. indicates the spec. category: k¹b¢d bammiqneh rich in cattle Gn 132; spec. category of men: haƒƒ¹dîq the righteous (coll.) Ec 317; h¹rœ±eh the shepherd(s) (coll.) > a shepherd; — 5. in comparison: kammœƒ like chaff Ps 14; lacking when comparison is more spec. described: k®q¢n m®šullaµ Is 162; — 6. w. abstracts: baƒƒ¹m¹° w. thirst Is 4117. (pg 75)
Hol4726 !mi
!mi: extended form yNImi 30 ×, -yNEmi Is 3011; usu. keeps form -!mi before art., rarely otherw.; usu. assimilated, !Bemi, before gutturals & r usu. me, ~d’a’me &c., but tAyh.mi, #Wxmi; before cons. w. shewa vl{v.miK. Gn 3824; before y>: ydeymi, but ynEveY>mi Dn 122; sf. yNIM,ñmi, &amp;’M,ñmi, WNM,mi, hN”M,mi, but ^M.mi, %Memi, also yNImi (4 ×) & yNIm,ñ (6 ×), Whn>m,( Jb 412, aWh-!mi Is 182•7; ~K,mi, ~h,me, hM’heme (2 ×), ~h,n>mi (1 ×), !heme Ez 1647•52: basic meaning out of, away from: — 1. spatial, a) indicates beginning-point of motion, out of, w. y¹ƒ¹° &c. Ex 1242, w. ‘save’ 1S 1735; min-haµœr from (the door-hole) = through SS 54; min-hû° w®h¹l®°â near & far Is 182•7; b) direction of movement, w. °el: mizzan °el-zan Ps 14413 , w. (w®) ±ad Ex 223 Lv 1312, cf. mimm®k¹ w¹hinnâ away fm. you in this direction 1S 2021, mi´´®mœ°l (to) northward Jos 1927, m¢r¹µôq (flee [to]) far away Is 223; c) indicates the place in whose direction ( = where) s.thg is: miqqedem eastward, in the east Gn 28, mibbayit inside Lv 1441; — 2. temporal: a) since, from (the time of): minn®±urîm 1S 122; the beginning-point is included: mi´´®nat hayyœb¢l from the year of jubilee (on) Lv 2717; b) just after: m¢µ¹qîƒ just after awakening Ps 7320, mimmoµ¯r¹t on the very next day Gn 1934; c) after: miqq¢ƒ y¹mîm a few days later Gn 43, miyy¹mîm some time later Ju 114; d) from the time when s.thg happens: mîmê qedem in primeval times Is 3726; w. inf., mibbô° at homecoming Is 231 ; — 3. designates a) the material out of wh. s.thg is made: min-h¹°­d¹mâ Gn 219, niskêhem midd¹m their bloody drink-offerings Ps 164; b) the place of origin: miƒƒor±â from Z. Ju 132; — 4. designates a) cause: m¢rê­µ mayim because of (= at) the scent of water Jb 149, m¢rœb because of (= by) the multitude of Ez 2818; b) originator: m¢hammelek (resulted) from the king = by the king’s will 2S 337, mimmennî ûm¢hem (which word,) mine or theirs Je 4428; c) subj. of active verb becomes obj. of min- w. passive vb.: mimmê hammabbûl (all life shall be cut off) by the waters of a flood Gn 911; — 5. designates position or standard of an assessor: a) q¹‰œntî min I am small, unimportant for (= I am too small for, I am unworthy of) (all the mercies) Gn 3211; rab mimm®k¹ hadderek, journey is too far for you 1K 194; b) in expressions of comparison, more than: µ¹k¹m min, wiser than 1K 511; w. vb., gadd¢l min, make s.thg greater than 1K 147; — 6. designates the logical cause: in consequence of, because of (cf. 4a): miqqœl haqqœr¢° Is 64 , mippî yhwh by Y.’s command 2C 3612; thus mibb®lî mibbiltî, because it is not, fm. lack of; — 7. w. vbs. of fearing, hiding, protecting, warning, from, against: a) y¹r¢° min Ex 3430, str (nif.) min Gn 414 &c.; b) thus, far from > without: mippaµad without fear Jb 219; — 8. part.; a) part of a whole: mikkol-yi´r¹°¢l (men) fm. all Isr. Ex 1825, m¢harb¢h (a few) of many Je 422; b) after adj., superlative: ha‰‰ôb w®hayy¹š¹r mibb®nê the best & fittest of 2K 103; c) the part is omitted: min-´¹r¹yw = one of his princes Dn 115; w. neg., m¢±abdê (not) anyone of the servants = none of 2K 1023; d) indef. part of the whole: midd¹m some of the blood Lv 59; w. °eµ¹d, °aµat, any of the things Lv 42; — 9. min w. inf.: a) m¢°ah­bat from his loving = because he loves Dt 78; b) m¢r®°ôt (eyes) dim from seeing = too dim to see, dim so that he could not see Gn 271; c) temporal: min-šilµô °œt¹m after he sent them away 1C 88; — 10. w. oth. preps.: a) min before oth. prep.: m¢°aµar, mibbên &c., « respective preps.; b) min after oth. prep.: l®min: l®m¢r¹µôq (I will fetch my knowledge) from afar Jb 363; temporal: from long ago Is 3726; l®mibbêt l® on the inner side of Nu 187, l®mittaµat l® underneath 1K 732; l®miyyôm since the days when 2S 711; — 11. Dt 3311 min-y®qûmûn conj. that … not (if true reading). (pg 201)

Now that we have looked at the Jewish refutation of the Trinity, let us turn our attention to the Christian defense of the Trinity. See below The Three Forms Of Unity: The Belgic Confession of Faith Article 9 and 11. It is in these two articles that all the verses will come into full view regarding the belief in the Trinity that Christians (not mimin) hold to.

Belgic Confession Article 9: The Proof of the Foregoing Article of the Trinity of Persons in One GodAll this we know, as well from the testimonies of Holy Writ as from their operations, and chiefly by those we feel in ourselves. The testimonies of the Holy Scriptures, that teach us to believe this Holy Trinity, are written in many places of the Old Testament, which are not so necessary to enumerate as to choose them out with discretion and judgment. In Genesis 1:26, 27, God saith: Let us make man in our image, after our likeness, etc.1So God created man in His own image, male and female created He them. And Genesis 3:22: Behold, the man is become as one of us.2 From this saying, Let us make man in our image, it appears that there are more persons than one in the Godhead; and when He saith God created, He signifies the unity. It is true He doth not say how many persons there are, but that which appears to us somewhat obscure in the Old Testament is very plain in the New.

For when our Lord was baptized in Jordan,3 the voice of the Father was heard, saying, This is My beloved Son: the Son was seen in the water, and the Holy Ghost appeared in the shape of a dove. This form is also instituted by Christ in the baptism of all believers. Baptize all nations, in the name of the Father and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost.4 In the Gospel of Luke the angel Gabriel thus addressed Mary, the mother of our Lord: The Holy Ghost shall come upon thee, and the power of the Highest shall overshadow thee, therefore also that holy thing which shall be born of thee shall be called the Son of God.5 Likewise, The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, and the love of God, and the communion of the Holy Ghost be with you.6 And, There are three that bear record in heaven, the Father, the Word, and the Holy Ghost, and these three are one.7 In all which places we are fully taught that there are three persons in one only divine essence. And although this doctrine far surpasses all human understanding, nevertheless we now believe it by of the Word of God, but expect hereafter to enjoy the perfect knowledge and benefit thereof in heaven.8

Moreover we must observe the particular offices and operations of these three persons towards us. The Father is called our Creator by His power;9 the Son is our Savior and Redeemer by His blood;10 the Holy Ghost is our Sanctifier by His dwelling in our hearts.11

This doctrine of the Holy Trinity hath always been defended and maintained by the true Church, since the times of the apostles to this very day, against the Jews, Mohammedans, and some false Christians and heretics, as Marcion, Manes, Praxeas, Sabellius, Samosatenus, Arius, and such like, who have been justly condemned by the orthodox fathers.

Therefore, in this point, we do willingly receive the three creeds, namely, that of the Apostles, of Nice, and of Athanasius; likewise that which, conformable thereunto, is agreed upon by the ancient fathers.


1Gen. 1:26,27

2Gen. 3:22

3Matt. 3:16-17

4Matt. 28:19

5Luke 1:35

62 Cor. 13:13

71 John 5:7

8Ps. 45:8; Isa. 61:1

9Eccl. 12:3; Mal. 2:10; 1 Pet. 1:2

101 Pet. 1:2; 1 John 1:7; 4:14

111 Cor. 6:11; 1 Pet. 1:2; Gal. 4:6; Tit. 3:5; Rom. 8:9; John 14:16

Belgic Confession Article 11: The Holy Ghost is True and Eternal God. We believe and confess also that the Holy Ghost from eternity proceeds from the Father1 and Son;2 and therefore is neither made, created, nor begotten, but only proceedeth from both; who in order is the third person of the Holy Trinity; of one and the same essence, majesty, and glory with the Father and the Son; and therefore is the true and eternal God, as the Holy Scriptures teach us.3


1Ps. 33:6,17; John 14:16

2Gal. 4:6; Rom. 8:9; John 15:26

3Gen. 1:2; Isa. 48:16; 61:1; Acts 5:3-4; 28:25; 1 Cor. 3:16; 6:19; Ps. 139:7

Works Cited

Michael S. Bushell, Michael D. Tan, and Glenn L. Weaver, BibleWorks, 8th ed. (Norfolk: BibleWorks, LLC., 2008), BibleWorks. v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Anstey, Matthew. Transliterated Hebrew Old Testament 2001 (BHT). n.p.: n.p., 2001. BibleWorks. v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Authorized Version, 1769 Blayney Edition (KJV). Oxford: Cambridge University Press, 1769. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Belgic Confession of Faith. n.p.: n.p. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Cook, Edward M., trans. The Psalms Targum: An English Translation (PST). n.p.: n.p., 2001. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Groves-Wheeler Morphology and Lemma Database (4.10) (WTM). Philadelpha: Westminster Theological Seminary, 2008. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Holladay, William L. A Concise Hebrew and Aramaic Lexicon of the Old Testament: Based upon the Lexical Work of Ludwig Koehler and Walter Baumgartner. Leiden: Brill, 2000. BibleWorks, v.8.

Joüon, Paul, and T. Muraoka. A Grammar of Biblical Hebrew. 2nd ed. Subsidia Biblica 27. Roma: Editrice Pontificio Intituto Biblico, 2006. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Rodkinson, Michael L. New Edition of the Babylonian Talmud: Original Text, Edited, Corrected, Formulated and Translated into English (ROD). 20 vols. Boston: The Talmud Society, 1918. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Stern, David H. The Complete Jewish Bible (CJB). Clarksville, MD: Jewish New Testament Publications, 1998. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Tanakh, A New Translation of the Holy Scriptures According to the Traditional Hebrew Text (TNK). Philadelpha: Jewish Publication Society, 1985. BibleWorks, v.8.

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

62a Chicago Bibliography Entries

Westminster Leningrad Codex (WTT). Philadelpha: Westminster Theological Seminary. BibleWorks, v.8.